Part Number Hot Search : 
2120B DM9301F SY5803 XXX4E AP89W20 KBPC25 02205 T2907A
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download HDRV200F Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 uide ick G Qu
www..com
DVD / Video Cassette Recorder with HDD
HDRV200F
1
Antenna Cable TV signal (Back of TV) or (Back of TV) Antenna
Connection to a TV
Cable TV signal
3
Connect RF cable (supplied)
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
or
4 Plug in the AC power cord of this unit.
1
Disconnect
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
/DVD
AUDIO OUT L
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN
R
R
Note
2
Connect
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R OUT
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
(Back of this unit)
* You can connect to TV with A/V cables or RF cable.
Choose one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of the equipment you possess.
Basic Audio Connection
Video Connections
Picture Quality HDD/DVD Basic
V V
V (V = Available, - = Not Available)
Good
OR
V
Best
OR
V
TV
AUDIO IN
VCR TV
(required)
S-VIDEO IN
(Compatible with the Progressive Scan mode)
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y
VIDEO IN
PB/CB
PR/CR
Audio cable (supplied)
Video cable (supplied)
S-Video cable (commercially available)
This unit
HDD/DVD/VCR
Component video cable (commercially available)
DD/DVD
AUDIO OUT
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
L
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT L COAXIAL R
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
R
VIDEO OUT
OUT
S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN PR/CR
R
R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
HDD/DVD
This unit
AUDIO OUT
L
Y
HDD/DVD/VCR
R
VIDEO OUT
IN
PB/CB
AUDIO OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD
PR/CR
* These jacks are useful only in
HDD / DVD mode. 1VMN21833
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
E4380UD / E438PUD 55555
2
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Initial Setups
F i r s t T i m e Yo u Tu r n o n t h e U n i t
1 2
After making all the necessary connections, turn on the TV, select the appropriate external input channel. Press POWER. The Display shown below will appear. This menu may not appear if you have already turned on the unit before. See page 21-24 of the Owner's Manual in such case.
OSD Language English Francais Espanol Espa
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
If you press PLAY B at this point, "English" will be selected automatically and the steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
3
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press / to select "English","Francais (French)" or "Espanol (Spanish)". Then, press ENTER. After selecting the language, the Auto Channel Preset will start automatically. After Auto Channel Preset is finished, the Auto Clock function will be activated automatically and the correct time will be set.
SKIP
4
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
TV Audio Setting
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
1 2 3
Press SETUP. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
Using / , select "Channel Setting". Press ENTER. Channel Setting Menu will appear.
Channel Setting Auto Preset uto Manual Manual Preset TV Audio Select Audio
Notes on TV channel audio
* Refer to the following table to check the appropriate setting. Broadcast audio Main-audio channel STEREO STEREO MONO MONO STEREO STEREO MONO MONO Sub-audio channel SAP NONE SAP NONE SAP NONE SAP NONE Selected HDD/DVD/VCR recording audio STEREO STEREO MONO MONO SAP STEREO SAP MONO
4
Using / , select "TV Audio Select". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
TV Audio Select Audio Stereo SAP
Stereo
5
SAP
Using / , select "Stereo" or "SAP". Press ENTER. Stereo: Outputs main-audio. SAP (Secondary Audio Program): Outputs sub-audio. Press SETUP to exit.
6
3
Recording and Playback Information
R e c o rd a b l e d i s c P l a ya b l e d i s c s
This unit is compatible with the following discs.
Discs with the following logos can be played back on the unit. Playback of other disc types is not guaranteed.
Disc Logo
www..com Discs which can be used with this recorder:
* DVD-R disc: up to 16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended) * DVD-RW disc: 2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended) Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder:
DVD-VIDEO
MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x TDK DVD-RW disc 2x JVC DVD-RW disc 4x MITSUBISHI DVD-R disc 8x Disc type Disc format Video mode
Video
DVD-RW (VIDEO/VR mode) DVD-R (VIDEO mode) CD-DA (AUDIO CD) CD-RW (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
Functions Playback, limited recording, limited editing Playback, recording, Original List / Playlist editing Playback, limited recording, limited editing
DVD-RW
DVD-RW VR mode VR
DVD-RW
Video mode DVD-R
DVD-R
CD-R (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
DVD players with are capable of playing DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Rec Mode
You can select a Rec Mode among six options, and the recording time and the picture/audio quality of recorded material depends on the Rec Mode you select.
Disc Size Rec Mode XP SP 8 cm Disc LP EP SLP SEP XP SP 12 cm Disc LP EP SLP SEP XP SP HDD (Internal) LP EP SLP SEP Recording Video / Sound time Quality 18 min 36 min 72 min 108 min 144 min 180 min 60 min 120 min 240 min 360 min 480 min 600 min 34 H 68 H 136 H 204 H 272 H 340 H (poor) (poor) (good) (poor) (good) (good)
Color systems
DVDs are recorded in different color systems throughout the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which is used primarily in the United States and Canada). This unit uses NTSC, you must use DVDs recorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back DVDs recorded in other color systems.
Region codes
DVDs must be labeled for ALL regions or for Region 1. Look for the symbols below on your DVDs.
To select the Rec Mode you prefer, press REC MODE repeatedly.
4
VR
Formatting a Disc
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
The recording format type you set here will be memorized and applied to the disc whenever you format DVD-RW discs.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1 2 3
Press SETUP. Using / , select "DVD Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "DVD Recording Format". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
DVD Recording F mat VD Format VR Video
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
4
Using / , select "VR" or "Video". Press ENTER. Auto Format Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, the unit will automatically format the disc in the recording format type you set in this section.
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
5
VR Video
HDD / DVD Recording
DVD-RW DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to the internal HDD or to DVDs. www..com
Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly.
Step 1: Choose a disc type & the Recording Format. (Only If you are recording to DVD.)
or
Step 2: Preparing the media
1 Turn on the unit. 2 Select the device you want to use. (If you are recording to the HDD, skip to step 3.)
TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
3 Open the disc tray, and place a disc on the tray.
4 Close the disc tray.
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
GHI REC MONITOR
2
JKL VCR
3
MNO HDD CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
2
3
CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ DVD
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
7
8
SPACE
9
It may take a while to load the disc.
0
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
0
* If you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, Auto Format will start automatically.
Step 5: Start Recording. Step 3: Select the Rec Mode.
SLOW STOP PAUSE REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR REC MODE REC/OTR DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR
* When recording to the HDD: Press REC / OTR (HDD). * When recording to the DVD: Press REC / OTR (DVD).
SLOW STOP PAUSE
HDD MODE
REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
HDD LP 65:56
CH8
I
HDD Rec LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
Step 6: Stop Recording. Step 4: Select the desired channel to record.
CH 8
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT .@/: ABC DEF SKIP REPLAY SKIP
HDD MODE
REV PLAY FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
C I
CHANNEL
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
HDD Rec Stop LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM
This operation may take a while to be recognized.
Note
HDD is a temporary storage location.
* HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage location until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
160GB Hard Disc
* This unit is equipped with an 160 GB hard disc which allows you to record up to 340 hours (with SEP mode).
6
VR Video
Basic Dubbing
DVD-RW DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD
VCR
We illustrated HDD to DVD dubbing here as an example. www..com Refer to the Owner's Manual on how to perform other types of dubbing.
5
Using / , select a desired program. Press ENTER. Program List Menu will appear.
Add to Dubbing List. Dubbing Playlist Pla Decide
1
Press DUBBING MENU. The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode menu will appear.
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD VCR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
High XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
6
Using / , select "Add to Dubbing List". Press ENTER. The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
DUBBING
Program List (Or am (Original)
Dubbing List Dub
1 Title 1 2 Title 2 3 Title 3 4 Title 4 5 Title 5 6 Title 6 7 Title 7 8 Title 8
2 Title 2
2
Using / , select the desired dubbing direction, then press ENTER. Example: HDD (c) DVD
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD VCR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
High XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
7 8
Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until you select all programs to be dubbed. After selecting all the programs you want, press RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
DUBBING
Dubbing List Dub
Direction HDD
DVD DVD
2 Title 2 4 Title 4
3
Using / , select a desired Rec Mode. Press ENTER. Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
DUBBING
Mode
XP
Select Prog am Program Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
Dubbing List
Direction HDD
DVD DVD
Mode
XP
9
Select Prog am Program Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
Using / , select "Dubbing Start". Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Start Dubbing? Star Dubbing?
4
Yes
No
Using / , select "Select Program". Press ENTER. Program List will appear.
DUBBING
10
Program List (Or am (Original)
Dubbing List
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Dubbing will start. * It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
1 Title 1 2 Title 2 3 Title 3 4 Title 4 5 Title 5 6 Title 6 7 Title 7 8 Title 8
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing preparation mode: * Press the Device Select Button of the recording media first, then press STOP C. Or, press STOP/EJECT C A on the front panel. To stop the dubbing in progress: * Press the Device Select Button of the recording media first, then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds or press STOP/EJECT C A on the front panel.
7
VR Video
Finalize
DVD-RW DVD-R
8
HDD
HDD / DVD Playback
VR Video
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
CD
You must first finalize the disc before playing it back on www..com other unit.
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
1 2 3
Press SETUP. Using / ENTER. , select "DVD Menu", then press
Using / , select "Finalize", then press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Finalize disc? Yes No
1 2 3
If you are playing the HDD, skip to step 4. Press OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray. Insert the disc with its label facing up. Align the Disc to the disc tray guide.
* If the disc has already been finalized, "Undo finalize" will be listed in the menu instead of "Finalize" (DVD-RW only).To Undo the finalization of the disc, select "Undo Finalize" and press ENTER.
disc tray guide
4
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
Are y sure? you Yes No
Press OPEN / CLOSE A again to close the disc tray. Press PLAY B to start playing back a CD. For HDD / DVD Playback, proceed to step 4. * It may take a while to load the disc.
4
5
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. Finalizing will start. * If you want to stop the process, press ENTER.
PressTOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
Finalize Finaliz
Cancel
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
This operation may take a while to be completed.
5 6
Using / / / , select a desired title, then press PLAY B. Playback will start. Press STOP C to stop playback.
9
B a s i c R e c o rd i n g
www..com
VCR
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
VCR
Before recording, make sure:
* The desired channel is selected by pressing the Number Buttons or CHANNEL / . * There is a videotape with a record tab in the unit. * The desired Rec Mode (SP: Standard Play or SLP: Super Long Play) is selected by pressing REC MODE on the remote control.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
Rec Mode
Tape speed Type of tape SP mode SLP mode Recording / Playback Time T60 T120 T160 T210 1 hour 2 hours 2-2 / 3 hours 3-1 / 2 hours 3 hours 6 hours 8 hours 10-1 / 2 hours
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
* Stereo or SAP is selected. Press VCR first.
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
1
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin the recording. To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press PAUSE F. After the unit has been in pause for five minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the videotape and the video head from damage. Press STOP C when the recording is completed.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
2
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a recorded videotape, remove its record tab. To record on it later, cover the hole with cellophane tape.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Record tab
Basic Playback
VCR
Press VCR first.
1
Insert a prerecorded videotape. Press PLAY B to begin playback. * If there is no record tab, playback starts automatically. During playback, press PAUSE F. Playback will pause and sound will be muted. Press PLAY B to resume playback. Press STOP C to stop playback. Press STOP / EJECT C A on the front panel of the unit to eject the videotape.
2
OPEN / CLOSE POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY REC/OTR CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD STOP PLAY HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
POWER
STOP / EJECT C A
3 4 5
Owner's Manual
Recordable disc
Discs which can be used with this recorder: www..com * DVD-R disc: up to 16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended) * DVD-RW disc: 2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended) Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder: MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x TDK DVD-RW disc 2x JVC DVD-RW disc 4x MITSUBISHI DVD-R disc 8x
Before You Start Connections
DVD / Video Cassette Recorder with HDD
Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
HDRV200F
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
Playback
INSTRUCCIONES EN ESPANOL INCLUIDAS.
Supplied Accessories
* Remote control * RF cable * Audio / Video cables * Owner's Manual (NB300UD) with two (WPZ0901TM002 or (WPZ0102TM015 or (1VMN21832) AA batteries WPZ0901CAB01) WPZ0102LTE01)
Owner's Manual
Editing
* Quick Use Guide (1VMN21833)
* Blank Media DVD-R disc x1 (KDDZZZZMB001)
Other Setups VCR functions Others
Please read before using this equipment. If you need additional operating assistance after reading this owner's manual or to order replacement accessories, please call TOLL FREE: 1-800-605-8453 or visit our web site at http://www.SylvaniaConsumerElectronics.com Before you use this unit , you need to complete connections. Refer to `Connections' on pages 17-19. To record a program easily, refer to `Easy HDD / DVD Recording' on pages 32-33 after connections are completed.
Espanol
Before You Start Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
www..com
CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated,"dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
Laser Safety
This unit employs a laser. Only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this device, due to possible eye injury. CAUTION: CAUTION: LOCATION: USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHERTHANTHOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. INSIDE, NEAR THE DECK MECHANISM.
FCC WARNING-This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the manual. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.
RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numerique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. CAUTION:TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TOWIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOC ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU'AU FOND.
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING
This product's packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your local recycling regulations. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning chemical wastes.
Make your contribution to the environment!!! * Used up batteries do not belong in the dust bin. * You can dispose of them at a collection point for used up batteries or special waste. Contact your council for details.
For Customer Use: Read carefully the information located at the back of this unit and enter below the Serial No. Retain this information for future reference. Model No. _____________________ Serial No. _____________________
2
Before You Start Precautions (Cont'd)
Before You Start
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. 2. Retain Instructions- The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should be followed. 5. Cleaning - Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. EXCEPTION: A product that is meant for uninterrupted service and, that for some specific reason, such as the possibility of the loss of an authorization code for a CATV converter, is not intended to be unplugged by the user for cleaning or any other purpose, may exclude the reference to unplugging the appliance in the cleaning description otherwise required in item 5. 6. Attachments - Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. 7. Water and Moisture- Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 8. Accessories - Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturer's instructions and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. 9. Ventilation - Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer's instructions have been adhered to. 10. Power Sources - This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. 11. Grounding or Polarization -This product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. 12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. 13. Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI / NFPA No. 70, provides information with regard
www..com
to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. (Fig.A)
FIGURE A EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21) GROUND CLAMP POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, PART H) ANTENNA LEAD WIRE
Connections Initial Setups
NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
Recording / Dubbing Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
14. Lightning - For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. 15. Power Lines - An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. 16. Overloading - Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. 17. Object and Liquid Entry - Never push objects of any kind into this product through any openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. 18. Servicing - Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 19. Damage Requiring Service - Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product. c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. d. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation. e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way. f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance this indicates a need for service. 20. Replacement Parts - When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards. 21. Safety Check - Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. 22. Heat - This product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
3
Before You Start Precautions (Cont'd)
Installation Location
For safety and optimum performance of this unit: www..com * Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top of the unit. Do not place the unit directly on top of the TV. * Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from sources of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid places. Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper heat dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes on the sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong vibration or strong magnetic fields.
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire
* Do not handle the power cord with wet hands. * Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it from AC wall outlet. Grasp it by the plug. * If, by accident, water is spilled on this unit, unplug the power cord immediately and take the unit to our Authorized Service Center for servicing.
Moisture Condensation Warning
Moisture condensation may occur inside the unit when it is moved from a cold place to a warm place or after heating a cold room or under conditions of high humidity. Do not use this unit at least for 2 hours until its inside gets dry.
About Copyright
Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Notice for progressive scan outputs
Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 525p progressive scan outputs, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the `standard definition' output. If there are questions regarding your TV set compatibility with this model 525p DVD recorder, please contact our customer service center.
4
Before You Start Precautions (Cont'd)
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
www..com
Before You Start
Dolby Digital Recording
Connections Initial Setups
"Dolby(R) Digital Recording enables consumers to record high-quality video with stereo sound on recordable DVD discs. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for higher video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs created using Dolby Digital Recording will play back on all DVD-Video players." Note: This is true when the players are compatible with actual recordable DVD discs.
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator
"Dolby(R) Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for higher video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using Dolby Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-Video players."
Recording / Dubbing Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
5
Before You Start Table of Contents
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Guide to Display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Guide to Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Other Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
www..com Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Information on Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . .48 One Touch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD . . . .50 Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape . . . . . . . .52 Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD .54 Deleting a Program from the Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . .57 Changing the Order of the Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD . . . . . . . .58 Settings for an External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Dubbing from an External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Protecting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Finalizing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Auto Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connection to a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Connection to a Cable Box or Satellite Box . . . . .18 Connection to an Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Playback Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Basic Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Direct Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Playback from the Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Playback from the Title List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Playback from the DVD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Playback from the Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Playing back MP3 / WMA Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Special Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Resume Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Fast forward / Fast reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Slow forward / Slow reverse Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Time Shift Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Simultaneous Playback and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Step-by-Step Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Variable Replay / Variable Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Random Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Program Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Title / Chapter Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Using SKIP H / G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Using DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Track Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Using SKIP H / G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Using DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Series Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Selecting a Format of Audio and Video . . . . . . . . . .86 Switching Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Switching Audio Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Switching Camera Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Visual Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Initial Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
First Time You Turn on the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 OSD Language Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Channel Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Getting Channels Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Adding / Deleting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Auto Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Setting Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 TV Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 TV Aspect Ratio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Recording / Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Information on Supported Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Easy HDD / DVD Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Formatting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Selecting the Recording Format Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Formatting a Pre-Recorded Disc (Disc Format) . . . . . . .35 Monitoring the Recording Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Creating Chapter Marks Automatically . . . . . . . . .37 Basic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 One Touch Recording (OTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Editing the Timer Programming Information . . . . . . . . .42 Hints for Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Recording & Playback Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Guide to the Programmed Recordings Screen . . . . . . . .44 Programming a Recording with the Recording & Playback Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 To Change or Cancel the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Playback and Edit with Programmed Recordings . . . . . .46
6
Before You Start Table of Contents (Cont'd)
www..com Information on Disc Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Guide to a Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 What are Original List and Playlist? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Available Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Deleting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Deleting Selected Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Deleting all Titles in HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Protecting / Undo Protecting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Editing Title Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Guide to Edit Title Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Deleting a Part of a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Dividing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Combining Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Moving Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Chapter Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Adding Chapter Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Deleting Chapter Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Adding Titles to a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Before You Start
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Timer Recording / Recording & Navigator . . . . . . . . . .128 Playback / Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Language Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Connections Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
Espanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover Other Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Tour of the Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Playback Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 1.Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 2. Disc Menu Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 3.Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 4. Subtitle Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 5.Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 6.Variable Replay / Skip Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 7.Angle Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 8.Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Display Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 1. FL Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 2. Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Reset to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Playback Editing Other Setups
VCR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Guide to Display Information (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . .121 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Basic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
VCR functions Others Espanol
7
Before You Start Features
The following features are available with this unit.
Recording www..com
This unit allows you to record on the HDD, a DVD-RW disc (rewritable) and a DVD-R disc (one-time write) as well as a videotape. You can choose any one for your convenience. HDD / DVD / VCR One Touch Recording (OTR) [ Page 39 (HDD / DVD) or Page 123 (VCR)] This feature allows you to start the recording right away with just one-touch. And each press of REC / OTR increases the recording time by 30 minutes. HDD / DVD Timer programming up to 32 programs [ Page 40~41] You can program the unit to record up to 32 programs within a one-month period. Daily or weekly repeating programs can also be programmed. Recording Monitor [ Page 36] You can check how the actual recording picture and the sound will be in the selected Rec Mode before attempting to record. Automatic Chapter Marker [ Page 37] Each recorded title is automatically marked with chapter marks. Automatic DVD Menu Making (Video mode only) [ Page 65] DVD Menus are made automatically when a Video mode disc is finalized. Automatic Playlist Making (VR mode discs and HDD only) [ Page 89] Playlists are automatically copied from the Original List, so that you can edit titles.
HDD 160GB Hard Disc [ Pages 29~31] This unit is equipped with an 160 GB hard disc which allows you to record up to 340 hours (with SEP mode). The HDD operates just like a VR mode DVD-RW disc. Most of the functions which are available with a VR mode DVD-RW disc can be performed on the HDD, too. Recording and Playback Navigation [ Pages 44~46] You can easily program recording or call and replay a title which is recorded in the past on the calendar. DVD Automatic Finalize (Video mode only) [ Page 64] You can set the disc to be finalized automatically at your desirable timing. Relay Recording [ Page 41] During Timer Recording to a DVD, if the disc runs out of the space, or if there is no recordable disc in the unit, it automatically changes the recording media to the HDD. VCR Left Channel Stereo Recording [ Page 127] Material that has been recorded to the left channel only can be automatically copied to the left and right channels when dubbing.
Dubbing
With this unit, you can enjoy bi-directional dubbing with HDD, DVD or VCR. HDD / DVD Maximum of x 20 HDD to VR mode DVD-RW disc dubbing speed (High Speed Dubbing) [ Pages 54~56] Up to 20 times high speed dubbing from HDD to VR mode DVD-RW disc is possible if you use the compatible disc. Just Dubbing [ Page 54] When dubbing from HDD to DVD, if you set the Rec Mode to "Auto", this unit will automatically select the most suitable Rec Mode for the dubbing.
8
Before You Start Features (Cont'd)
Playback
HDD / DVD / VCR www..com Simultaneous Playback and Recording [ Page 75] You can play back a title while recording. HDD / DVD Theater-quality Sound at Home [ Page 19] When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder that is compatible with Dolby Digital, you can experience a theater-quality sound environment. Variable Skip [ Page 76] You can skip a certain time, which is specified in the Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while playback. Variable Replay [ Page 76] You can skip back a certain time, which is specified in the Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while playback. Progressive Scan System [ Page 17] Unlike the standard definition output system (interlace scanning), the progressive scan system provides less flickering and higher resolution images than the traditional scanning system does. HDD Time Shift Playback [ Page 75] You can play back from the top of the recording title while recording without waiting for the recording to end. Series Search [ Page 84] You can search for the group of titles made with the same Periodical Timer Recordings. Before You Start
Symbols Used in this Manual
The available functions depend on the type of disc or the Recording Format. To specify disc type or Recording Format for each function, we put the following symbols at the beginning of each function description. Symbol
HDD
VR
Connections
Description Available to (internal) HDD Available to VR mode DVD-RW discs Available to Video mode DVD-RW discs Available to DVD-R discs Available to DVD-Video discs Available to Audio CDs Available to CD-RW / R discs with MP3 files Available to CD-RW / R discs with WMA files Available to VHS tapes Use only tapes marked with this unit.
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-V CD
MP3
Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
WMA
VCR
Playback
Editing
HDD / DVD Deleting Titles [ Pages 90~91] You can delete titles you no longer need. Making Playlists [ Pages 108~109] While the Original List remains as it is, you can edit titles in the Playlist. Putting Names on Titles Setting / Clearing Chapter Marks Dividing / Combining Titles Deleting Parts of Titles Moving Titles Protecting Titles [ Page 93] You can prevent accidental editing or title erasing.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This unit is not compatible with Multiple Bit Rate (MBR: a file that contains the same content encoded at several different bit rates).
Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
"WMA" (Windows Media Audio) is a new audio developed by Microsoft(R) in the United States of America.
9
Before You Start Functional Overview
Front Panel
www..com 3 2
* The unit can also be turned on by pressing these buttons.
4
5
6*
7
8
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
1 26
25 24
23 22
21
20
19 17 18
16
15* 13 11 10 14* 12
9
1 POWER: Press to turn the unit on / off. 2 POWER Light: Lights up when the power is on. 3 REC/OTR Light (VCR): Lights up during VCR recording. 4 Cassette compartment: Place a videotape here. 5 Dubbing Light: Lights up during dubbing. 6 OPEN / CLOSE A* (DVD): Press to open / close the disc tray. 7 REC/OTR Light (HDD/DVD): Lights up during HDD/DVD recording. 8 Disc tray: Place a disc here. 9 AUDIO IN (LINE2):Connect the audio output of an external device here using the supplied audio (L / R) cable. 10 VIDEO IN (LINE2): Connect the video output of an external device here using the supplied video cable. 11 S-VIDEO IN (LINE2): Connect the S-Video output of an external device here using a commercially available S-Video cable. 12 RESET: Press with a sharp pointed object to restart the unit when it freezes. Also refer to the `Note' below. 13 REC / OTR I (HDD / DVD): Press once to start a basic recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR (One Touch Recording). Each press increases the recording time by 30 minutes up to 8 hours. 14 PLAY B* (HDD / DVD): Press to start playback or resume playback.
15 STOP C * (HDD / DVD): Press to stop playback, recording or dubbing. 16 Device Select Buttons / Indicators: VCR : Press to activate the VCR. Lights up when VCR is selected. HDD: Press to activate the HDD. Lights up when HDD is selected. DVD : Press to activate the DVD. Lights up when DVD is selected. 17 DUBBING HDD(c)DVD: Press to start One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD. 18 DUBBING VCR(c)DVD: Press to start One Touch Dubbing from VCR to DVD. 19 CHANNEL K / L: Press to change the channel. 20 Front Panel Display: Shows information and messages. 21 Remote control sensor: Receives signals from the remote control. 22 REC / OTR I (VCR): Press once to start a basic recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR (One Touch Recording). Each press increases the recording time by 30 minutes up to 8 hours. 23 PLAY B (VCR): Press to start playback. 24 F.FWD D (VCR): Press to fast forward or fast search. 25 REW E (VCR): Press to rewind or rewind search. 26 STOP / EJECT C A (VCR): Press to eject the videotape. Press to stop recording or playback.
Note
After pressing RESET,
* The settings for the items listed below will be lost; -Clock Setting -Timer Program Setting -Resume point * The settings for the item listed below will not be lost, but need to be set again. -Channel Setting * All other settings will remain memorized.
10
Before You Start Functional Overview (Cont'd)
Rear Panel
www..com
Before You Start
2
3
4
5
6
Connections
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT L COAXIAL R
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN PR/CR
R
R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
Initial Setups
OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD
1
1 AC Power Cord: Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit. 2 S-VIDEO IN (LINE 1): Connect the S-Video output of an external equipment here using a commercially available an S-Video cable. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD): Connect the component video input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using a commercially available component video cable. 4 AUDIO IN (LINE 1): Connect an external equipment here using a supplied audio cable. 5 AUDIO OUT: Connect the audio input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the supplied audio (L / R) cable. 6 TV ANTENNA IN: Use to connect an antenna. 7 TV ANTENNA OUT: Use to connect an antenna cable to pass the signal from the TV ANTENNA IN to your TV monitor.
12 11
10
9
8
7
8 VIDEO OUT: Connect the video input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the supplied video cable. 9 VIDEO IN (LINE 1): Connect the video output of an external device here using the supplied video cable. 10 S-VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD): Connect the S-Video input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using a commercially available S-Video cable. 11 AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD): Connect the audio input of a TV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the supplied audio (L / R) cable. 12 COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD): Connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder or other equipment with a coaxial digital input jack with a digital coaxial cable.
Note: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Recording / Dubbing Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
11
Before You Start Functional Overview (Cont'd)
Remote Control
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
15 16 17*
1
.@/: ABC DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
18
2
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
3 4 5 6
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
19 20 21
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
22 23
7 8
REV
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
PLAY
FWD
9 10* 11 12
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
13
DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE
14
24 25 26 27* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 POWER:Turns the unit on / off. 2 Number Buttons: Press to select channel numbers. Press to select a title / chapter / track on display. Press to enter setting values. Press to enter the index number / desired time to search in VCR mode. 3 PROGRAM RECORDINGS: Press to call up the Recording & Playback Navigation Screen. 4 SETUP: Press to display the Setup Menu. The unit switches to the HDD / DVD mode when this button is pressed. 5 MENU / LIST (HDD / DVD): Displays the Disc Menu. Switch the Original List and the Playlist. 6 Cursor / / / : Selects items or settings. 7 DISPLAY: Displays the on-screen menu. 8 SKIP j / i (HDD / DVD): During playback, press to skip to the previous / next chapter or track. Or when playback is paused, press to play back in forward / reverse step by step. 9 REV E: (HDD / DVD) During playback, press to play back in fast reverse. Or when playback is paused, press to play back in slow reverse. (VCR) Press to rewind the videotape or to view the picture rapidly in reverse during the playback mode. 10 PLAY B * : Press to start or resume playback. If you press this button when the power is off, the unit will be turned on and the playback will start automatically. If the resume point has been set, the playback will start from the resume point. 11 SLOW (VCR): During playback, press to view the videotape in slow motion. 12 REC MONITOR (HDD / DVD): Press to check the picture and the audio qualities for recording. 13 REC MODE: Press to select the Rec Mode. 14 DUBBING MENU: Press to display the Dubbing Menu. The unit switches to the HDD / DVD mode when this button is pressed. 15 TIMER PROG.: Press to display the Timer Program List. The unit switches to the HDD / DVD mode when this button is pressed.
12
Before You Start Functional Overview (Cont'd)
16 INPUT SELECT: Press to select an input device. www..com 17 OPEN / CLOSE EJECT A (DVD / VCR) *: Press to open / close the disc tray or eject a videotape. 18 CHANNEL / : Press to change the channel up / down. (VCR) Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in slow motion of the videotape. Also while playback is in still mode, you can adjust the picture blurred vertically. 19 CLEAR: (HDD / DVD) Press to clear the information once entered, etc. (DVD) Press to erase the track number entered in the program playlist for a CD. (VCR) Press to reset the tape counter. 20 AUDIO: During playback, press to change the AUDIO Setting. 21 TOP MENU (HDD / DVD): Displays the Top Menu. 22 ENTER: Press to confirm or select menu items. 23 RETURN : Press to return to the previously displayed Menu Screen. 24 VARIABLE SKIP (HDD / DVD): Skips by the set in advance. 25 VARIABLE REPLAY (HDD / DVD): Replays by the set in advance. 26 FWD D: (HDD / DVD) During playback, press to play back in fast forward. Or when playback is paused, press to play back in slow forward. (VCR) Press to rapidly advance the videotape or view the picture rapidly in forward during playback. 27 STOP C * : Press to stop playback, recording, or dubbing. 28 PAUSE F: Press to pause playback or recording. Before You Start
Device Select Buttons:
29 VCR: Press to activate the remote control in VCR mode. (See page 16.) Press to activate the VCR. 30 HDD: Press to activate the remote control in HDD mode. (See page 16.) Press to activate the HDD. 31 DVD: Press to activate the remote control in DVD mode. (See page 16.) Press to activate the DVD. REC / OTR (VCR): Press once to start a basic VCR recording. Press repeatedly to start a One Touch Recording in VCR mode. REC / OTR (HDD): Press once to start a basic HDD recording. Press repeatedly to start a One Touch Recording in HDD mode. REC / OTR (DVD): Press once to start a basic DVD recording. Press repeatedly to start a One Touch Recording in DVD mode. SEARCH MODE (VCR): Press to call up the index or Time Search Menu.
Connections Initial Setups
32
Recording / Dubbing
33
34
Playback
35
Editing
* In HDD / DVD mode the unit can also be turned on by pressing these buttons.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
13
Before You Start Functional Overview (Cont'd)
Front Panel Display
www..com
2
3
4
P-SCAN
1
PM
TIME SHIFT
DB
VCR HDD DVD
CD R W
5 6
7
1 PM : Appears in the afternoon with the Clock Display. 2 TIME SHIFT : Appears during the Time Shift Playback. 3 Title / Track and Chapter mark : Appears when indicating a title / track number. : Appears when indicating a chapter number. 4 Current status of the unit : Appears when Timer Recording is in Standby, or is proceeding. Disappears when all the Timer Recordings are finished. P-SCAN : Appears when the picture output is progressive scan. : Appears when a videotape is in the unit. DB : Lights up during a dubbing process. 5 IHDD : Lights up during recording with HDD. IDVD : Lights up during recording with DVD. IVCR : Lights up during recording with VCR. 6 Disc type and current status of the unit CD : Appears when an audio CD or a disc with MP3 / WMA files is on the disc tray. : Appears when a DVD-R disc is loaded on the R disc tray. RW : Appears when a DVD-RW disc is loaded on the disc tray. 7 Displays the following * Played-back time * Current title / chapter / track number * Recording time * Clock * Channel number * VCR tape counter * Remaining time for a One Touch Recording
Display message
Appears when the unit is turning on. Appears when the unit is turning off.
Appears when the disc tray is opening.
Appears when a disc is loaded on the disc tray.
Appears when the disc tray is closing.
14
Before You Start Functional Overview (Cont'd)
Guide to Display Information The Display Menu gives you information on the playwww..com back status of the HDD or DVD. Display Example :
Press DISPLAY once to show the information on the current operation mode. Press DISPLAY one more time to see more information, and to call up the icons for the available features. Before You Start
Guide to Setup Menu
This unit uses the following on-screen menu for most operations. It allows you to change the settings of the unit to match the environment, and to customise the settings as you prefer. "Easy Setting Menu" and "Advanced Menu" are available. "Easy Setting Menu" consists of those frequently needed. You can make all required settings using "Advanced Menu".
Connections
1
DVD MODE DVD Play
T
8 / 8 C 1 / 4 0:00:04/ 1:30:00 AAA
2 3
How to use Setup Menus :
Press SETUP to display "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu". Choose either menu using / then press ENTER. * CD Menu is available only when a CD is loaded. ,
Initial Setups
4
Press DISPLAY.
Example:Advanced Menu
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup
DVD MODE T 8 / 8 C 1 / 4 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
Recording / Dubbing
DVD Recording Format
Timer Program CD Easy Setting Menu
5
?
NR
Playback
Using
/
, select a menu, then press ENTER.
Each section includes the information as listed below: 1 Device mode 2 * Current title number / total number of the titles * Current chapter number / total number of the chapters * Elapsed playback time of the current title / total time of the title 3 * Playback status * Name of the current title 4 Playback status icon 5 Icons for the available features:
Advanced Menu
Editing
DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup Timer Program
OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Record
CD Easy Setting Menu
Display Reset to factory default
Other Setups
: Search : Audio : Subtitle : Angle : Repeat : Zoom : Noise Reduction
Using / , select an Item to set, then press ENTER. Sub menu or option window will appear.
VCR functions
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup Timer Program CD OSD Language Clock Setting OSD Language Channel Setting English Playback Fracais ais Espanol Espa ol Record Display
Others
Note
* This is an example screen only for explanation. Displayed items varies depending on the actual mode. * The information will not appear under the following conditions; - When there is no title recorded in the HDD/DVD. - During recording (DVD only). * Closed Caption will not be displayed while the Display Information is shown on the screen.
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Using // press ENTER.
/
, make your desirable selection, then
Espanol
Available menus vary among discs.
15
Before You Start Functional Overview (Cont'd)
Other Overviews Installing batteries in the remote control www..com Switching HDD / DVD / VCR modes
Because this product is a combination of a HDD, DVD, and VCR recorder, you must select first which component you wish to operate. HDD mode Press HDD on the remote control. (Verify that the HDD indicator is lit.) DVD mode Press DVD on the remote control. (Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.) VCR mode Press VCR on the remote control. (Verify that the VCR indicator is lit.) Install two AA-size batteries (supplied), matching their polarity to those indicated inside the battery compartment of the remote control.
1
2
3
Battery use and care
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please follow the instruction below: * Do not mix new and old batteries together. * Do not use different kinds of batteries together. Although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. * Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. * Remove batteries from equipment that is not going to be used for a month or more. * When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or public rules for environmental protection that apply in your country or area. * Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or disassemble batteries.
Device Select Buttons / Indicators
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY REC/OTR CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD STOP PLAY HDD REC/OTR DVD
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
RESET
8
SPACE
9
VCR DVD
S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Using a remote control
Keep in mind the following when using the remote control: * Make sure that there is no obstacle between the remote control and the remote sensor of the unit. * Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the remote sensor of the unit. * Remote control for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remote controls for other equipment located close to the unit. * Replace the batteries when you notice a fall-off of the operating range of the remote control. * The maximum operable ranges (approximate) from the unit are as follows. - Straight line: 23 feet (7 m) - Either side of center: 16 feet (5 m) within 30 16 feet (5 m) within 15 - Above: 10 feet (3 m) within 30 - Below:
VCR
HDD
DVD
DVD Button HDD Button VCR Button DVD Button / Indicator HDD Button / Indicator VCR Button / Indicator
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
* Pressing the device select button on the front panel DOES NOT switch the device mode of the remote control. You MUST select the correct device mode on the remote control. * If you press REC / OTR of each device, recording starts in its device mode. * When the buttons listed below are pressed, the unit switches to the HDD / DVD mode. - TIMER PROG. - SETUP - DUBBING MENU * When the button listed below is pressed, the unit switches to the HDD mode. - PROGRAM RECORDINGS
16 feet (5 m) (15)
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
HDD DVD
16 feet (5 m) 23 feet (7 m) (30)
16
16 feet (5 m) (30) 10 feet (3 m) (30)
Connections Connection to a TV
Antenna
Before You Start
www..com
(Back of TV)
or
Cable TV signal
(Back of TV)
Antenna
Cable TV signal
Connections
3
Connect RF cable (supplied)
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
or
4 Plug in the AC power cord of this unit.
1
Disconnect
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
/DVD
AUDIO OUT L
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN
R
R
Note
2
Connect
Initial Setups
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R OUT
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
(Back of this unit)
* You can connect to TV with A/V cables or RF cable.
Choose one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of the equipment you possess.
Basic Audio Connection
Video Connections
Picture Quality Basic
V V
V (V = Available, - = Not Available)
Recording / Dubbing
Good
OR
V
Best
OR
V
Basic Audio
HDD/DVD VCR
TV
AUDIO IN
(required)
S-VIDEO IN
(Compatible with the Progressive Scan mode.)
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y
VIDEO IN
Playback
TV
PB/CB
PR/CR
Audio cable (supplied)
Video cable (supplied)
S-Video cable (commercially available)
This unit
HDD/DVD/VCR
Component video cable (commercially available)
Editing
DD/DVD
AUDIO OUT
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
L
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT L COAXIAL R
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
R
VIDEO OUT
OUT
S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN PR/CR
R
R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
HDD/DVD
This unit
AUDIO OUT
L
Y
HDD/DVD/VCR
Other Setups
R
VIDEO OUT
IN
PB/CB
AUDIO OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD
PR/CR
* These jacks are useful only in
HDD / DVD mode.
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VCR functions
Note
* Connect this unit directly to the TV. * The HDD/DVD and VCR is sending each video signals simultaneously. * You will not be able to hear all of the sound being output by this unit if you use the video/audio cables (supplied) to a monaural TV that has only one audio input jack. * Be sure that the colours of the jacks and plugs match up when connecting the cable. * The S-VIDEO OUT and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks are only useful for HDD/DVD playback. * If your TV is compatible with the Progressive Scan System, and you want to utilize its feature, use COMPONENT VIDEO OUT connection. If you use any other connection such as VIDEO OUT or S-VIDEO OUT, the picture will not be output in the Progressive Scan mode but in the standard output mode (Interlace).
Others
If your TV is compatible with 525 or 625 progressive scanning and you want to enjoy the high quality picture;
Use COMPONENT VIDEO OUT connection, set the "Progressive" to "On" in the Setup Menu (see page 117), and make sure "P.SCAN" indication is on the Front Panel Display.
If your TV is not compatible with Progressive Scan;
If your TV is not compatible with progressive scanning, set "Progressive" to "Off " in the Setup Menu, and make sure no "P.SCAN" indication is on the Front Panel Display.
Espanol
17
Connections Connection to a TV (Cont'd)
After you have completed connections
Turnwww..com your TV to the appropriate external input channel (usually near channel 0) in order to view the pictures output from this unit on the TV. To find the external input channel press the channel button on your TV's remote repeatedly until the DVD recorder's picture appears. External input channels may vary depending on the connection you made. Check your TV owner's manual for details.
Input Mode Names for Common TV Brands (Example)
Admiral Curtis Mathis GE Hitachi JVC Kenwood LXI-Series Magnavox
AUX LINE1, LINE2, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93 INPUT, TV / VCR, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93 INPUT, AUX VIDEO, VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3 AUX 00 AUX CHANNEL
Panasonic RCA Samsung Sanyo Sharp Sony Toshiba Zenith
TV/ VIDEO INPUT, TV / VCR, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93 TV/ VIDEO VIDEO 00 VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3 TV / GAME 00
Connection to a Cable Box or Satellite Box
(Cable box or Satellite box)
IN OUT
(Back of this unit)
D/VCR
OUT ANTENNA IN
Cable TV signal
L
R
OUT
OUT
RF cable (supplied)
E
(Back of TV)
This connection allows you to view or record a scrambled channel. With this connection, channels cannot be changed on this unit. You can view or record ONLY the channels you have selected on the cable box or the satellite box. * Read the instruction manual of the cable box or the satellite box also.
Note to the Cable TV System Installer:
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the National Electrical Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding-in particular, specifying that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as possible.
18
Connections Connection to an Audio System
* When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off. * Refer to the operation manual accompanying external devices for more information.
www..com
Before You Start
Method 1 Stereo system Analog audio input jacks AUDIO
Method 2 Dolby Digital decoder, MD deck or DAT deck
Connections
COAXIAL
Digital audio input jack
Initial Setups
Audio cable (supplied)
Digital Coaxial cable (commercially available)
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
This unit
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
Recording / Dubbing
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO OUT
L
R
Setting Connection or
HDD/DVD
AUDIO OUT L
Initial Setup >Playback >Audio Out >
PCM -
Dolby Digital Stream PCM PCM
Playback
If output is Dolby Digital encoded audio, connect to a Dolby Digital decoder. Unless connected to a Dolby Digital decoder. Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck.
R
Editing
* To complete these settings. (See pages 115-116.)
Note
* By connecting this unit to a Multi-channel Dolby Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby Digital 5.1 channel surround sound as heard in the movie theaters. * The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital 5.1 channel surround format cannot be recorded as digital sound by an MD or DAT deck. * Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may generate noise distortion and may also damage the speakers.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
19
Initial Setups First Time You on the Unit
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Right after the purchase of the unit, do the Initialize Setting by taking the following procedures. This menu may not appear if you have already turned on the unit.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1 2
CLEAR
After making all the necessary connections, turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input channel. (See page 18.) Press POWER. The Display shown below will appear. These menus may not appear if you have already turned on the unit. If you have already turned on the unit before, refer to `OSD Language Setting' on page 21 to select a language for the on-screen displays and the menus, `Channel Setting' on page 22 to setup the channels, and `Clock Setting' on page 24 to set the clock.
OSD Language English Francais Espanol Espa
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
If you press PLAY B at this point, "English" will be selected automatically and the steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
3
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press / to select "English","Francais (French)" or "Espanol (Spanish)". Then, press ENTER. The following screen will automatically appear and the Auto Channel Preset will start. as If you like to skip this step, press RETURN soon as the search begins.
Auto Preset uto
4
After Auto Channel Preset is finished, the Auto Clock function will be activated automatically and the correct time will be set.
20
Initial Setups OSD Language Setting
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before you start
If you have already set the OSD Language when you first turned on the unit, you can skip this section.
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Easy Setting Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
2
Using
/
, select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER. Recording / Dubbing
DVD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record
Advanced Menu
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
HDD Menu Initial Setup
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Easy Setting Menu
Display
Playback
Reset to factory default
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
3
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Using / , select "OSD Language". Press ENTER. OSD Language Menu will appear.
OSD Language English Fracais Espanol Espa
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Other Setups
4 5
Using / , select a language. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. * The default setting is "English". Press SETUP to exit.
VCR functions Others Espanol
21
Initial Setups Channel Setting
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Getting Channels Automatically
If you have already set the channels when you first turned on the unit, you can skip this section. After resetting the settings or whenever you move to a new area, we recommend you to program available channels in your area with the following procedures.
CHANNEL
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1 2
CLEAR
Press POWER. Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input channel. (See page 18.)
VIDEO/TV
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
TV's remote control *This button can be labeled as INPUT, AUX, etc.
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
3
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu
REV
PLAY
FWD
DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu
DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program
Delete Playlist Playlist
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Easy Setting Menu
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup Timer Program Record Display Easy Setting Menu Reset to factory default OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback
5
Using / , select "Channel Setting". Press ENTER. Channel Setting Menu will appear.
Channel Setting Auto Preset uto Manual Manual Preset TV Audio Select Audio
22
Initial Setups Channel Setting (Cont'd)
Before you start
6
www..com
Using / ,select "Auto Preset". Press ENTER. The unit will start getting channels available in your area.
3
Using / , select "Channel Setting". Press ENTER. Channel Setting Menu will appear.
Channel Setting Auto Preset uto Manual Manual Preset TV Audio Select Audio
Connections Initial Setups
Auto Preset uto
4
Wait for several minutes for channel scanning to finish. After Auto Preset has stopped: * Use CHANNEL / or the Number Buttons to change the channel. * When you use the Number Buttons, press 0 first for a single digit number. * Use INPUT SELECT to select an external input channel ("L1" or "L2") of this unit.
Using / , select "Manual Preset". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
CH 1 Add Delete
Recording / Dubbing
5
Using / , select the channel number to add or delete. * Use / or CHANNEL / to change the channels one by one, or use the Number Buttons to select the channel directly. Using / , select "Add" or "Delete". Press ENTER. The channel number will be added or deleted from the channel memory. Then, the next channel number will appear so that you can continue adding or deleting channels.
CH 1 Add
Playback
Adding / Deleting Channels
The channels you no longer receive or seldom watch can be deleted from the memory. You can also add channels manually into memory.
6
Editing
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
Delete
Other Setups
7
Press SETUP to exit.
Easy Setting Menu
VCR functions
2
Using / , select "Initial Setup" Press ENTER.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup Timer Program Record Display Easy Setting Menu Reset to factory default OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback
Note
* External Input Channels ("L1" or "L2") cannot be skipped. * You cannot change the channel while the unit (HDD, VCR or DVD) is in the recording, OTR or Timer Recording mode. * If the auto presetting is cancelled during presetting, some of the channels not yet preset may not be received. * The selection will depend on how you receive the TV channels. * To cancel the Auto Preset during scanning: Press RETURN .
Others Espanol
23
Initial Setups Clock Setting
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
If you have already set the Clock when you first turned on the unit, you can skip this section. Set the clock before you try Timer Recording. If Public Broadcasting Service (PBS) is available in your area, follow the Auto Clock Setting below. If not, refer to `Manual Clock Setting' on page 25. Make sure the antenna / cable TV connections are correct. * You cannot set the clock while the unit is in the recording, OTR or Timer Recording mode.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
Auto Clock Setting
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
If this unit is connected to a Cable Box or Satellite Box, select the local PBS station to set the clock automatically.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu
ENTER
DVD Menu DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
DISPLAY
RETURN
HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Easy Setting Menu
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
2
Using
/
, select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record Display
Advanced Menu
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
HDD Menu Initial Setup
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
3
Using / , select "Clock Setting". Press ENTER. Clock Setting Menu will appear.
Clock Clock Setting Clock Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting uto Clock Daylight Saving Time Daylight Sa
4
Using / , select "Auto Clock Setting". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Auto Clock Setting uto Clock Off Auto Manual Man
24
Initial Setups Clock Setting (Cont'd)
Before you start
5
www..com in your area :
If you do not know the PBS channel number
Manual Clock Setting
Using / , select "Auto". Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. If you know the PBS channel number in your area : Using / , select "Manual". Press ENTER. Input window will appear.
Set Channel No No. CH 1
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
Connections Initial Setups
Easy Setting Menu
2
, enter the
Using
/
, select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup Timer Program Record Display OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback
Advanced Menu
/ Using the Number Buttons or PBS channel number. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Recording / Dubbing
If you want to set the clock manually and to cancel the Auto Clock Setting : Using / , select "Off ". Press ENTER. The Auto Clock Setting will be canceled. * The default setting is "Auto".
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Playback
3
6 7
Press SETUP to exit. Press POWER to turn off the unit. This unit will search for the clock time only when the power is off. Leave it off for several minutes to give the unit a time to set the clock.
Using / , select "Clock Setting". Press ENTER. Clock Setting Menu will appear.
Clock Clock Setting Clock Clock Setting
Editing
Auto Clock Setting uto Clock Daylight Saving Time Daylight Sa
4
Note
* The clock may set itself automatically after you connect the antenna / cable signal to this unit and plug in the power cord. In this case, the current time will appear on the Front Panel Display. * If the current time is not displayed or the displayed clock time is not correct, set the clock manually.
Using / , select "Clock Setting". Press ENTER. Clock Setting Window will appear.
Clock Clock Setting ue) MAR / 15 / 2005 (Tue) 11 : 26 AM
Other Setups VCR functions
5 6
Using using ence.
/ /
, move to the item your want to set, and , change the setting to suite your prefer-
When all the information is entered, press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. Although seconds are not displayed, they will be counted from zero. Press SETUP to exit.
Others
7
Note
Espanol * Your clock setting will be lost if either there is a power failure or this unit has been unplugged for more than 30 seconds.
25
Initial Setups Clock Setting (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Setting Daylight Saving Time
When Daylight Saving Time is on, the clock will automatically move forward one hour at 2:00 a.m on the first Sunday in April and move back one hour at 2:00 a.m on the last Sunday in October.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Using
/
, select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu HDD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record
Advanced Menu
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Initial Setup
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Easy Setting Menu
Display Reset to factory default
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3
Using / , select "Clock Setting". Press ENTER. Clock Setting Menu will appear.
Clock Clock Setting Clock Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting uto Clock Daylight Saving Time Daylight Sa
4
Using / , select "Daylight Saving Time". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Daylight Saving Time Daylight Sa On Off
5
Using / , select "On" to activate the Daylight Saving Time. Press ENTER. If you do not want to use the Daylight Saving Time feature select "Off ". * The default setting is "On". Press SETUP to exit.
6
26
Initial Setups TV Audio Setting
You can select an audio channel to output from TV.
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before you start
1
DEF
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu
DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Delete Playlist Playlist
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
Easy Setting Menu
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
2
Using
/
, select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu HDD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Advanced Menu
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Initial Setup Timer Program
Record Display Easy Setting Menu Reset to factory default
Note
* This unit CANNOT record in both stereo and SAP (Secondary Audio Program) at the same time.
Playback
3
SAP (Secondary Audio Program);
* SAP is the Secondary Audio Program which is usually used as an alternate in bilingual broadcasting, such as a broadcasting in Spanish.The SAP signal is delivered using the sub-audio channel.While the main-audio channel has 2 channels for L & R, the sub-audio channel has only 1 channel.Therefore, the SAP will always be broadcasted in monaural sound (outputting the same sound from the left and the right speakers).
Using / , select "Channel Setting". Press ENTER. Channel Setting Menu will appear.
Channel Setting Auto Preset uto Manual Manual Preset TV Audio Select Audio
Editing
4
Using / , select "TV Audio Select". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
TV Audio Select Audio Stereo SAP
Other Setups
Notes on TV channel audio
* If you want to record a TV program available in second audio or stereo on HDD, DVD-RW/R discs or videotape, you have to select either "Stereo" or "SAP" beforehand. Refer to the following table to check the appropriate setting. Broadcast audio Main-audio channel STEREO STEREO MONO MONO STEREO STEREO MONO MONO Sub-audio channel SAP NONE SAP NONE SAP NONE SAP NONE Selected audio HDD/DVD/VCR recording STEREO STEREO MONO MONO SAP STEREO SAP MONO
VCR functions
5
Stereo
Using / , select "Stereo" or "SAP". Press ENTER. Stereo: Outputs main-audio. SAP (Secondary Audio Program): Outputs sub-audio. Refer to the item in `Glossary' on page 134 for more information. * The default setting is "Stereo".
Others
SAP
6
Press SETUP to exit. Espanol
* You can only play back the disc in second audio if a TV program is available in second audio and you set TV Audio Select to SAP.
27
Initial Setups TV Aspect Ratio Setting
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
You can select the TV aspect ratio to match the formats of what you are playing back on the unit and your TV screen (4:3 standard or 16:9 widescreen TV).
1
.@/:
ABC
DEF
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. If "Advanced Menu" is displayed, proceed to step 3.
Easy Setting Menu DVD Menu Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Advanced Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
2
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Using / , select "Advanced Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu HDD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record
3
Advanced Menu
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Initial Setup
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Easy Setting Menu
Display Reset to factory default
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
4
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using / , select "Playback". Press ENTER. Playback Menu will appear.
Playbac Playback TV Aspect Parental Loc arental Lock Disc Menu Language Menu Audio Language Subtitle Language Audio Out udio Variable Replay/Skip Speed le Replay/Skip Angle Icon Progressive Prog
5
Using / , select "TV Aspect". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
TV Aspect 4:3 Letter Bo Box 4:3 Pan & Scan an 16:9 Wide
Note
* If you have a standard TV: Select "4:3 Letter Box" for full-length picture with black bars on the top and bottom of the screen. Select "4:3 Pan & Scan" for a full-height picture with both sides trimmed. * If you have a widescreen TV: Select "16:9 Wide".
6 7
Using / , select a desired option. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. * The default setting is "4:3 Letter Box". Press SETUP to exit.
28
Recording / Dubbing Information on Supported Media
Media types
: Most suitable. www..com You want to Record TV programs Reuse by deleting unwanted contents Edit recorded contents Edit/Record from connected equipment Copy discs for distribution Play on other HDD/DVD/ VCR equipment
*1 *2 *1 *1 *2
Before you start
: Can be used. HDD
: Some functions are limited. DVD-RW VR
: Cannot be used. DVD-R VCR
DVD-RW Video
Connections Initial Setups
VR mode DVD-RW can only be played on DVD equipment that is VR compatible. Programs can be recorded from other equipment, but they cannot be edited. HDD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVD-RW VR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 Yes Yes DVD-RW Video Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No DVD-R No Yes No Yes No Yes No VCR Yes
Features Recording Rewritable Can create chapters at fixed intervals (auto.) Can create chapters wherever you like (manual) Can record 16:9 size pictures Can record copy-once programs Editing Can perform basic edit functions Can perform advanced edit functions (Playlist edit)
*1
Recording / Dubbing
No No No Yes No
Playback
No
CPRM compatible disc only.
Note: For details of the above functions and implied restrictions, see the explanations inside the manual.
Information
This unit can record on DVD-RW discs and DVD-R discs. DVD-R discs allow you to record programs only once, and the recorded contents cannot be erased. DVD-RW discs allow you to record programs repeatedly, and the recorded contents can be erased. There are 2 recording format,VR mode and Video mode, for DVD-RW discs while there is only one recording format, Video mode, for DVD-R discs. VR mode is the basic recording format for the DVD-RW disc. It is suited for editing the recorded contents, and playable only on the DVD-RW compatible unit.VR mode disc has both Original List and Playlist, and creates the Playlist automatically when programs (titles) are recorded. Video mode is the same recording format as those DVDVideo discs purchased locally. Video mode disc can be played back on most DVD players. Although the available editing menus are limited compare to the VR mode disc, you still can add or delete the recordings, or edit the contents before finalizing.Video mode disc has only Original List, and creates the DVD Menu automatically when it is finalized. Logo Attributes
Recordable disc
Discs which can be used with this recorder: * DVD-R disc: up to 16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended) * DVD-RW disc: 2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended) Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder: MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x TDK DVD-RW disc 2x MITSUBISHI DVD-R disc 8x JVC DVD-RW disc 4x Disc type Disc format Video mode
Video
Editing Other Setups
Functions Playback, limited recording, limited editing Playback, recording, Original List / Playlist editing Playback, limited recording, limited editing
DVD-RW
VCR functions
DVD-RW VR mode VR
DVD-RW
Video mode DVD-R
DVD-R
Others
DVD players with are capable of playing DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode.
DVD-RW
8 cm / 12 cm, single-sided, single layer disc Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode): 600 minutes (4.7 GB) (for 12 cm) 180 minutes (1.4 GB) (for 8 cm)
Espanol
DVD-R
29
Recording / Dubbing Information on Supported Media (Cont'd)
Rec Mode
You can select a Rec Mode among 6 options, and the www..com recording time and the picture/audio quality of recorded material depends on the Rec Mode you select.
Disc Size
Note
* This recorder cannot record on CD-RW or CD-R discs. * DVD-RW/R discs and CD-RW/R discs recorded on a personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder may not be played back if the disc is damaged or dirty or if there is dirt of condensation on the player's lens. * If you record on a disc using a personal computer, there are cases in which it may not be played back because of the settings of the application software used to create the disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible format. (Check with the software publisher for more detailed information.) * Discs recorded in Video mode on this unit cannot record additionally using other DVD recorders. * Since the recording is made by the variable bit rate (VBR) method, the actual remaining time for recording may be a little bit shorter than the remaining time displayed on the OSD, depending on the picture you are recording. * Playlist will be created automatically when recording to VR mode DVD-RW disc and HDD.
Rec Mode XP SP
Recording Video / Sound time Quality 18 min 36 min 72 min 108 min 144 min 180 min
60 min 120 min 240 min 360 min 480 min 600 min 34 H 68 H 136 H 204 H 272 H 340 H
(poor) (poor) (good) (good)
8 cm Disc LP
EP SLP SEP
XP SP
12 cm Disc LP EP
SLP SEP XP SP
HDD (Internal)
(good)
LP EP SLP SEP
About DVD+RW/R discs
(poor)
To select the Rec Mode you prefer, press REC MODE. The information of the selected media (internal HDD or DVD) will be displayed.
* You cannot use DVD+RW/R disc for recording. * Only the finalized Video mode DVD+RW/R discs can be played back on this unit. * If you insert a blank DVD+RW/R disc, an error message will appear. * The performance of DVD+RW/R discs on this unit is not guaranteed.
Restrictions on recording
HDD XP 17:32 CH7
Indicates the remaining time of the disc when recorded with the selected Rec Mode. Press REC MODE repeatedly to change the Rec Mode. The speed will be changed each time you press it with the following order:
XP SEP SP SLP LP EP
You cannot record copy protected discs or tapes using this unit. Copy protected material includes DVD-Video and some satellite broadcasts. If copy protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will be paused or stop automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. Copy-once programs can only be recorded on the HDD or on a CPRM compatible VR mode DVD-RW disc (see below).
Maximum Recordable numbers of title / chapters
300 titles per each Playlist and Original List 999 chapters per title VR mode DVD: 99 titles per each Playlist and Original List 999 chapters per each Playlist and Original List Video mode DVD:99 titles per disc 99 chapters per title HDD:
The information will disappear in a few seconds, or press DISPLAY to exit. * The recording time is an estimate and actual recording time may differ. * Audio and video quality decreases as the recording time becomes longer. * Each time you press REC MODE, remaining recording time is displayed.
30
Recording / Dubbing Information on Supported Media (Cont'd)
What is CPRM? About HDD
HDD is a special component which has high recording density and is suited for long-time recording or high-speed cueing but by contrast, has many factors which can cause breakage. Use HDD on the premise that you should dub the recorded programs to a DVD disc or a videotape to protect your precious videos. This is a format used to record copy-once programs. By recording coded data on the area of discs that ordinary writing software cannot write, it prevents copyonce programs from being recorded repeatedly on different media. This unit is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but then you cannot make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on the HDD or VR mode DVD-RW disc, and CPRM recordings can only be played back on DVD players that are compatible with CPRM.
www..com
Before you start Connections
HDD is a temporary storage location.
HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage location until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
Initial Setups
Information on copy control
Some satellite broadcasts include copy protected information. For their recording, refer to the following.
Disc type / format Copy -free Copy -once Copyprohibited
Be sure to dub (back up) data promptly if you find abnormalities in HDD.
If there is mechanical trouble with the HDD, grinding or other sounds may be heard or blocky noise may appear on the image. If you continue to use as it is, deterioration may continue and eventually the HDD may not be used at all. If you notice these symptoms of a failing HDD, promptly dub the data to a DVD disc or a videotape. When an HDD fails, recovery of recorded content (data) may be impossible.
Recording / Dubbing
HDD
VR
DVD-RW
Video
ver.1.1,1.2 ver.1.1,1.2 CPRM compatible ver.1.1,1.2 ver.1.1,1.2 CPRM compatible ver.2.0
Playback
DVD-RW DVD-R
About the remaining capacity of HDD recording time:
In recording to HDD, the Remaining Capacity Display may differ from the actual recordable time as this unit adopts Variable Bit Rate encoding, which varies the recording (storage) amount of data in conformity with the information amount of video. Before recording to the HDD, ensure there is sufficient space on the HDD by deleting unnecessary titles in advance. (Remaining capacity will not increase if you only delete Playlists.)
VCR
Editing
Recordable Not Recordable
Making discs playable on other DVD player (Finalize)
After recording, you must finalize the disc in order to play on other units. (See page 63.) * For Video mode discs, the finalization is required. * For VR mode discs, the finalization is recommended. * For the information on videotapes, refer to `VCR functions' on pages 121-127.
Other Setups VCR functions
Playable
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET
S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
This Unit
DVD player Not Playable
Others Espanol
31
Recording / Dubbing Easy HDD / DVD Recording
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to the internal HDD or to DVDs. Note: Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly. www..com
Step 1: Choose a disc type & the Recording Format. (Only If you are recording to DVD.)
There are several types of recordable DVDs to choose from. Choose a recordable disc type based on your playback / recording / editing needs. Refer to `Information on Supported Media' on pages 29-31 to determine which disc type is most suited for your needs. Also, refer to page 34 to set the Recording Format for your disc. This unit can record on the type of discs on the right.
or
Step 2: Preparing the media
1 Turn on the unit. 2 Select the device you want to use. (If you are recording to the HDD, skip to step 3 on the next page.)
TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
3 Open the disc tray, and place a disc on the tray.
4 Close the disc tray.
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
GHI REC MONITOR
2
JKL VCR
3
MNO HDD CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
2
3
CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ DVD
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
7
8
SPACE
9
It may take a while to load the disc.
0
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
0
* If you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, Auto Format will start automatically.
Continue on the next page.
Note
HDD is a temporary storage location.
* HDD is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage location until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
32
Recording / Dubbing Easy HDD / DVD Recording (Cont'd)
www..com
Before you start
Step 3: Select the Rec Mode.
SLOW STOP PAUSE REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Connections
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
HDD LP 65:56
CH8
Initial Setups
Step 4: Select the desired channel to record.
CH 8
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Recording / Dubbing
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM
Playback
Step 5: Start Recording.
* When recording to the HDD: Press REC / OTR (HDD). * When recording to the DVD: Press REC / OTR (DVD).
I
HDD Rec LP 65:56 0:06:50 CH8
SLOW STOP PAUSE SLOW STOP PAUSE
Editing
HDD MODE
REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
or
Other Setups
Step 6: Stop Recording.
SKIP REPLAY SKIP
VCR functions
HDD MODE
REV PLAY FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
This operation may take a while to be recognized.
C I
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
HDD Rec Stop LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
Others Espanol
33
Recording / Dubbing Formatting a Disc
www..com
TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Selecting the Recording Format Type
VR Video
DVD-RW
POWER
DVD-RW
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Selecting the recording format type The recording format type you set here will be memorized and applied to the disc whenever you format DVD-RW discs.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Delete Playlist Playlist
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2 3
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Using / , select "DVD Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "DVD Recording Format". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
DVD Recording F mat VD Format VR
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Video
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Using / , select "VR" or "Video". Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. * The default setting is "Video". Auto Format Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, the unit will automatically format the disc in the recording format type you set in this section. The following message will appear if a Timer Recording is programmed to start in 15 minutes: "In the middle of programming timer. Format disc?" If you select "Yes", the formatting process will continue. If you select "No", or do not replay in 1 minute, the formatting will not be performed. Auto Format will not be performed under the conditions listed below; - During HDD Playback or recording.
Note
* The Recording Format Setting is effective only for DVD-RW discs.You cannot change the recording format for a DVD-R disc. DVD-R discs will always be in Video mode. * You cannot mix two formats on one DVD-RW disc.When you load a disc once recorded before, the recording format cannot be changed even if you change it in the Setup Menu.
34
Recording / Dubbing Formatting a Disc (Cont'd) Formatting a Pre-Recorded Disc www..com (Disc Format)
VR Video
Before you start
6
Formatting is complete when the progress bar reaches to the right end.
Connections
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
If you format a pre-recorded disc, all the data contained in it will be erased and the disc will return to the blank media status. This feature is only available with the DVDRW disc.
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
Initial Setups
Completed
The screen returns to normal after formatting is completed. This operation may take a while to be completed.
Recording / Dubbing
Easy Setting Menu
Note
* When you reformat the disc, all contents of the disc will be erased. * A disc once formatted with this unit cannot be used on other DVD recorders unless finalized.
2 3
Using
/
, select "DVD Menu". Press ENTER.
Playback
Using / , select "DVD Disc Format". Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Format disc? mat Yes es No
Editing
4
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
Are y sure? you Yes es No
Other Setups
5
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Formatting will start. The progress bar extends depending on the progress status of formatting.
VCR functions Others
DVD Disc Format VD Format
Espanol
35
Recording / Dubbing Monitoring the Recording Quality
VR Video
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
With REC MONITOR, you can check how the actual recording picture and the sound quality will be in the selected Rec Mode before attempting to record. If you are recording to the HDD, press HDD first. If you are recording to a disc, press DVD first.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
CLEAR
While in the stop mode, press REC MONITOR.
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
HDD XP 17:32
CH8 Rec Monitor
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Indicates the remaining time of the disc when recorded with the selected Rec Mode.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW STOP PAUSE REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press REC MODE repeatedly to change the Rec Mode. The Rec Mode will be changed as you press the button as shown below. Refer to `Rec Mode' on page 30. * You cannot change the Rec Mode during recording.
XP SEP SP SLP LP EP
3
Press REC MONITOR again to exit.
36
Recording / Dubbing Creating Chapter Marks Automatically
VR Video
Before you start
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
You can sort out the recording by inserting chapter marks every set time interval.
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. If "Advanced Menu" is displayed, proceed to step 3.
Easy Setting Menu DVD Menu enu HDD MENU HDD Menu enu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Advanced Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2 3
Using / , select "Advanced Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Advanced Menu
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
HDD Menu Initial Setup
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Timer Program Record Display
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Using / , select "Record". Press ENTER. Record Menu will appear.
Record Playback Pla Auto Finaliz uto Finalize Record Auto Chapter uto
Other Setups
5
Using / , select "Auto Chapter". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Auto Chapter uto Off 5 min minutes 10 minutes minutes Display 15 min Displa minutes 30 min minutes
VCR functions
Notes for "Auto chapter"
* The actual setting time for chapter marks may differ from the time you selected in Video mode. * Depending the recording time, a chapter with no image may be created at the end. * Chapter marks will automatically be inserted at the set interval with "Auto Chapter". (Chapter marks will not be inserted while recording is paused.) For inserting chapter marks at other spots, refer to `Chapter Marker' on pages 104-107. * With Video mode DVDs discs, you cannot add / delete chapter marks.
60 min minutes
6
Using / , select desired time option. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. * The default setting is "10 minutes". Press SETUP to exit.
Others
7
Espanol
37
Recording / Dubbing Basic Recording
VR Video
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Follow steps below to record TV programs. Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-RW discs for recording copy-once programs. (See page 31.) If you are recording to the HDD, press HDD first. If you are recording to a disc, press DVD first. Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a DVD.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input channel. (See page 18.) Using REC MODE, select a Rec Mode. Refer to `Rec Mode' on page 30. Make sure that the recording format is set to the desired mode. Refer to `Selecting the Recording Format Type' on pages 34. Using CHANNEL / , or the Number Buttons, select a desired channel to record.
CH 8
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
2 3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
4
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
5
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) to start recording. The information will be displayed for 5 seconds.
HDD MODE
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
I
HDD Rec LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
Note
* Recording starts immediately after you press REC / OTR (DVD) and continues until the disc is full or you stop recording. * When the Clock Setting has not been made, the space for a date and time of title names in the Original List or Playlist will be blank. * When you record a TV program broadcasted in both Stereo and SAP-audio on a DVD-RW/R discs, you have to select the TV channel audio (Stereo or SAP) beforehand. Only the selected channel audio will be recorded. Refer to `TV Audio Setting' on page 27 for more details. * Up to 300 titles can be recorded on the HDD. * Up to 99 titles can be recorded on the DVD-RW/R discs.
Press PAUSE F to pause recording. Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) or PAUSE F to resume recording.
6
Press STOP C to stop recording.
38
Recording / Dubbing One Touch Recording (OTR)
VR Video
Before you start
This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks of 30 minutes. If you are recording to the HDD, press HDD first. If you are recording to a disc, press DVD first. Preparing for OTR: * Check that the recording media has enough recordable space for the time you set. * If you are recording to a DVD, insert a recordable disc. * Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-RW discs for recording copy-once programs. (See page 31.)
HDD DVD-RW DVD-RW www..com
DVD-R
6
Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) repeatedly to change the recording time.
HDD MODE
Connections
I
HDD Rec LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
Initial Setups
OTR (0:30)
0:30 (Normal Recording) 1:00
1 2
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input channel. (See page 18.)
8:00 7:30
Recording / Dubbing
Using REC MODE, select a Rec Mode. Refer to `Rec Mode' on page 30. * You can check the current Rec Mode by pressing REC MONITOR. If you are using a DVD-RW disc, make sure that the recording format is set to the desired mode. Refer to `Formatting a Disc' on pages 34-35. Using CHANNEL / or the Number Buttons, select a desired channel to record. Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD). Recording will start.
HDD MODE
3 4 5
The recording time will be extended by 30 minutes every time you press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD). * The maximum recording time is 8 hours. * With HDD / DVD OTR, the recording time that exceeds the remaining time of the recording media will not be displayed. * To change the recording time during the One Touch Recording, Press REC / OTR (HDD / DVD) repeatedly.
Playback
7
When OTR ends, the unit will turn off automatically except under conditions listed below. - If a Timer Recording is programmed to start in 5 minutes. - During playback of HDD / DVD / VCR. - During recording of HDD / DVD / VCR. - While displaying menus or information on the screen. * To cancel the OTR in progress, press STOP C.
Editing Other Setups
I
HDD Rec LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
VCR functions Others
Note
* The remaining recording time will be displayed on the Front Panel Display during a One Touch Recording. Press DISPLAY to see it on the TV screen. * You cannot pause a One Touch Recording. * The unit will turn off automatically under the following conditions. - When a power failure occurs.
Espanol
39
Recording / Dubbing Timer Recording
VR Video
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
You can program the unit to record up to 32 programs within a month in advance. Daily or weekly recordings are available. Preparing for Timer recording: * Be sure to set the clock before programming a Timer Recording. Refer to `Clock Setting' on pages 24-26. * Check that the recording media (internal HDD or DVD) has enough recordable space for the time you set. * Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a DVD. Use only the HDD or CPRM-compatible VR mode DVDRW discs for recording copy-once programs.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
1
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Press TIMER PROG. Timer Program List will appear.
TIMER PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 1/ 1
Fri FEB/ 3 i
9:10AM
Start Star Time End Time
HDD LP 52:38
CH Rec To o Mode
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Date
New Program New Prog am
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
* You can access this screen from the Setup Menu also.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Using / , select a line indicated "New Program". Press ENTER. Timer Programming Window will appear. 4
Date Start Time 3 9 : 10 AM End Time 10 : 10 AM CH 8
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
5
Rec To
6
Mode
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Fri
FEB/
HDD HDD LP
LP 0:39
1
2
3
7
40
Recording / Dubbing Timer Recording (Cont'd)
1 Recording Date:
www..com the current date, the setting When pressing at
Before you start
5
will change as follows. e.g.: January 1st
JAN / 01 Mon-Sun Mon-Sat Mon-Fri Sat Fri
To exit, press TIMER PROG. * If you turn the unit off, it automatically turns on and starts recording 3 minutes before the Timer Recording begins, and when the recording is completed, you will be asked whether to turn off the unit.The unit will be turned off automatically if you select "Yes" or if you do not reply in 1 minute. * To stop recording in progress, press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds, or press STOP C on the front panel. Relay Recording If the disc runs out of the space during Timer Recording to a DVD, or if there is no recordable disc in the unit, it automatically detects it and change the recording media to the HDD. This feature is available only for Timer Recording. Not available for OTR.
Connections Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
Sun JAN / 31
Note
* If you have not set the clock yet: The Clock Setting Window will appear at step 1 in stead of Timer Program List. Continue with step 4 in `Auto Clock Setting' on page 24 or `Manual Clock Setting' on page 25 before setting a Timer Recording. * After step 5, you can use other devices as usual. * If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set for HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will automatically switch to the programmed channel 15 seconds before the programmed time, and the recording in progress on the VCR will be cancelled UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording for HDD or DVD will start without cancelling the recording currently in progress on the VCR. In this case, the recording of the same channel will be made on both VCR and the HDD or DVD. * If the starting time and the end time are the same, it will be recognized as 24 hours recording. * If the starting time you entered is already in the past, the recording will start as soon as you activate the Timer Recording by pressing ENTER at step 4. * If the Timer Recording you want to make starts at 11:00 P.M., for example, and ends at 1:00 A.M. next day, enter the date of the starting time, then enter the starting time as 11:00 P.M. and end time as 1:00 A.M.
2 Start Time: 3 End Time: 4 Recording Channel: To record from an external input, select "L1" or "L2". (Using camcorder, or other source.) 5 Recording Media (HDD or DVD): To record onto the HDD, select "HDD". To record onto a disc, select "DVD". VCR is not compatible with Timer Recording. 6 Rec Mode: Refer to `Rec Mode' on page 30. 7 Available recording time left on the HDD / DVD under the programmed Rec Mode. * If there are more than one program, the recording time of the programs other than the one being edited currently will not be counted in the calculation of the total remaining time on the disc.
Playback Editing Other Setups
3
Using / , select an item to set and using / , set the contents to suit your preference. * Pressing RETURN will resets all the information entered. Press ENTER when all the information is entered. will appear in the Front Panel Display indicating one or more Timer Recordings are in standby. * To set another program, repeat steps 2 to 4. * When programs are overlapped, a warning message will appear. For details on overlapped Timer Programmings, refer to `Hints for Timer Recording' on page 43.
VCR functions
4
Others Espanol
41
Recording / Dubbing Timer Recording (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Editing the Timer Programming Information
1
PressTIMER PROG. Timer Program List will appear.
TIMER PROGRAMMING 1/ 1
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Fri FEB/ 3
Date
9:10AM
Start Time End Time
HDD LP 52:38
CH Rec To Mode
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Fri FEB/ 3 Fri FEB/ 3 Fri FEB/ 3
9:00AM 9:30AM 10:30AM
10:00AM 10:30AM 11:00AM
8 6 4
HDD HDD HDD
LP LP LP
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
2
Using / , select the program you want to edit. Press ENTER. Editing Menu will appear.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Program Change Edit Title Name
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Delete
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
3
REV
PLAY
FWD
To change the setting of a program: 1. Using / , select "Program Change", then press ENTER. Timer Programming Window will appear.
Date Start Time 3 9 : 30 AM End Time 10 : 30 AM CH 6 Rec To Mode
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Fri
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
FEB/
HDD HDD LP
LP 0:39
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
2. Using / , move to the item you want to / to change the setting. change, then press To edit a title name: 1. Using / , select "Edit Title Name", then press ENTER. Editing Window will appear.
_
TIMER PROGRAMMING
Space Right Left BS Clear
A F K P U Z 1 ! + ?
B G L Q V 2 " , @
C H M R W 3 # [
D I N S X 4 $ . ]
E J O T Y 5 % / ^
a f k p u z 6 & : _
b g l q v 7 ' ; {
c h m r w 8 ( < |
d i n s x 9 ) = }
e j o t y 0 * > ~
Decide
Return
2. By following the steps in `Guide to Edit Title Name' on page 95, edit the title name. When you finish entering the title name, / / / , select press PLAY B. Or using "Decide", then press ENTER.
42
Recording / Dubbing Timer Recording (Cont'd)
To delete a program from the list:
www..com "Delete", then press 1. Using / , select
Before you start
Hints for Timer Recording
The priority of overlapped settings
When the timer programmings are overlapped, you will receive a warning message. If this happens, check the timer programming and change the programming as necessary. Otherwise, the unit will prioritize recording as described below.
ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Delete this Timer Prog am? Program? Yes No
Connections
Same start time and different end time:
You can access this screen by pressing CLEAR instead of ENTER at step 2. 2. Using / the title. , select "Yes" if you want to delete The program set first has the priority.
PROG. 1 PROG. 2
Initial Setups
4
PressTIMER PROG. to exit.
Actual PROG. 1 PROG. 2 recording The first 15 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
Recording / Dubbing
Different start time and different end time:
Note
* As to the timer program in progress (which is shown in red in the Timer Program List), you only can edit the end time.The changes made during recording will be recognized as only specific to that recording in progress and it will not affect the daily or the Weekly Recording Setting.
A program with the earlier start time has the priority.
PROG. 1 PROG. 2
Playback
PROG. 3 PROG. 3 PROG. 2 PROG. 1
Actual recording
The first 15 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
Editing
Recording time is entirely overlapped: PROG. 2 will not be recorded.
PROG. 1 PROG. 2 Actual recording PROG. 1
Other Setups
End time of Program 1 is the same as the start time of Program 2:
PROG. 1 PROG. 2 Actual recording PROG. 1 PROG. 2
VCR functions
The last 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
The amount of time cut off differs depending on the recording media.
Others Espanol
43
Recording / Dubbing Recording & Playback Navigator
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Guide to the Programmed Recordings Screen
HDD
DEF
.@/:
ABC
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
With the Recording & Playback Navigator, you can easily program the Timer Recordings for the HDD by using the calender displayed on the screen. Also the recorded titles (programs) can be played back or edited just by selecting the titles on the display. * The Recording & Playback Navigator is only available for the HDD Original List. * When you press PROGRAM RECORDINGS, the Programmed Recordings Screen will be displayed on the TV screen.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Programmed Recordings Screen
PROGRAMMED RECORDINGS
Completed
Scheduled
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
6:00AM - 7:00AM CH 8ch XP
Previous Recordings
SAT SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
REV
PLAY
FWD
Scheduled Recordings
TODAY
CH
AM
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
SAT
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
24
5
A
REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
CH
CH
86
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
6
7 8 9
CH
4
B
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3 1 Preview window:
4
Playback the preview of recorded programs.
2 Information:
Shows the information on the selected program.
Note
* With the Recording & Playback Navigator, you can program Timer Recordings up to one week ahead. The recordings programmed for the days more than one week ahead will not be displayed in the Programmed Recordings Screen. * You can program more than 1 Timer Recordings in one cell, but only the timer program that has the earlier starting time will be displayed in the Programmed Recordings Screen. * To see all the programs entered in a cell, press REV h or FWD g. * If power is failed or unplugged from the outlet, some information in the Programmed Recordings Screen may be lost. * Only the titles in the HDD Original List can be played back using the Recording & Playback Navigator.
3 Previous recordings:
When the normal recording / Timer Recording has started, the cell turns blue and the channel number will be displayed. (e.g. [A])
4 Scheduled Recordings:
When a programming is completed, the cell turns pink and the channel number will be displayed. (e.g. [B]) Programmed Recordings Screen shows a two-week calendar. (One week prior to and one week after the current day.) * Programmed Recordings can be programmed in this screen for programs broadcasted during next week. * If more than one week has passed since recording, the recorded programs cannot be replayed or edited with Programmed Recordings. * The screen describes each day as a day of the week, other than TODAY.
44
Recording / Dubbing Recording & Playback Navigator (Cont'd) Programming a Recording with the www..comPlayback Recording & Navigator
HDD
Before you start
To Change or Cancel the Program
HDD
Connections
Before programming, be sure to select the desired Rec Mode. (See page 36 on how to select the Rec Mode.)
1 2
Repeat steps 1-2 above. Press ENTER to call up the menu window.
1 2
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS. Switches to the HDD mode, and the Programmed Recordings Screen will appear. Using / / / , select the desired cell. * For example, to record from 4:00 pm two days from the present day, choose the cell as follows.
ordings
THU FRI
Initial Setups
Program Prog am Change Display Displa Timer Prog am Program New Program New Prog am
3
Scheduled Recordings
TODAY
PM
SUN MON
TUE WED THU
FRI
SAT
3 4 5
Present day Tomorrow Cell Day after tomorrow
To change the program Using / , select "Program Change", then press ENTER. Timer Programming Window will appear. Correct the information, then press ENTER. To cancel the program Using / , select "Timer Program", then press ENTER. Timer Programming List will appear. Press CLEAR . Confirmation window will appear. Select "Yes", and press ENTER. To program a new Timer Recording Using / , select "New Program", then press ENTER.
Recording / Dubbing Playback
There are two ways to program a recording. 1) Direct Program---Press CHANNEL / or the Number Buttons to select a channel. Press ENTER.The cell turns pink indicating that the timer programming is now set in that cell. Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS to exit. 2) Detailed Program---Press ENTER "New Program" will appear.With "New Program" selected, press ENTER again. Timer Programming Window will appear.
Date Start Time 3 9 : 00 AM End Time 10 : 00 AM CH 8 Rec To Mode
Editing
4
Press TIMER PROG. to exit. Other Setups
Fri
FEB/
HDD HDD LP
LP 0:39
VCR functions
Enter the necessary information by following the instructions described in `Timer Recording' on pages 40-43.
Others Espanol
45
Recording / Dubbing Recording & Playback Navigator (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Playback and Edit with Programmed Recordings
HDD
DEF
.@/:
ABC
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1 2
CLEAR
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS. The unit switches to the HDD mode, and the Programmed Recordings Screen will appear. Using / / / , select the recorded program. The recorded program plays back in the preview window. Press ENTER to call up the menu window.
Play From Start Play From Star Resume Pla Play
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
3
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Edit Previous Previous Recordings
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
4
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using / , select "Play From Start". Press ENTER. The recorded program is played back. If you want to resume playback from the last viewed point: Select "Resume Play" in step 3. Refer to `Resume Playback' on page 72. To edit a title: Select "Edit" in step 3. Refer to `Guide to Edit Title Name' on page 95. To display a Title List: Select "Previous Recordings" in step 3. Refer to `Playback from the Title List' on page 68.
46
Recording / Dubbing Information on Dubbing
VR Video
Before you start
You can copy a HDD/DVD disc to a videotape or copy a videotape to a HDD/DVD disc.This function will be possible only if the DVD disc or the videotape is not copy protected. Before starting this function, prepare for the recording on the DVD-RW/R disc or the videotape. Refer to page 32 (HDD/DVD) or page 122 (VCR).
HDD DVD-RW DVD-RW www..com
DVD-R
VCR
Available Dubbing Direction for Copy-Once Program
(O=Available X=Not Available)
From HDD (Internal)
Difference between (dubbing) Copy and Move
COPY (dubbing) program HDD (internal) The program remains MOVE program HDD (internal) The program does not remain
DVD-RW(VR)
To DVD-RW(VR) (CPRM-combatible) DVD-RW (Video) DVD-R Videotape HDD (Internal) Videotape
Connections
O*1,*2 X X O *2 X O *2
Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
program DVD-RW
program DVD-RW
HDD (Internal) O DVD-RW(VR) O *2 (CPRM-combatible) Videotape DVD-RW(VR) X (Not CPRM-combatible) DVD-R X *1:The program (recorded) moves. (It will be deleted from HDD.) *2:You cannot dub the recorded program to HDD or DVDRW again. (Copy control signal will be recorded to the videotape.)
Playback
Note for dubbing
* When you dub using DUBBING MENU, be aware that all the programs in the Dubbing List will be erased when you switch Original List and Playlist, if you want to dub programs from the both lists , (Original List and Playlist), finish up the dubbing of one list first and then make dubbing of the other list. Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
47
Recording / Dubbing One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
With One Touch Dubbing, you can start dubbing right away with just one touch. * Recordable DVD must be in the unit. (See pages 29-31.) * There should be enough space on the recording DVD. * Recording Format (VR or Video) and the Rec Mode must be selected before recording. * Make sure to press the corresponding Device Select Button before using the device of your choice. Limitations: * You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs. * You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs. * If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing cannot be started. Be noted that with HDD to DVD dubbing, the duration of the dubbing is the duration of the dubbing title (except for the High Speed Dubbing). * If a copy control signal is detected, the dubbing cannot be started. * You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the titles or the chapters of the disc is at its limit. * Dubbing cannot be executed during HDD or DVD recording. * Dubbing cannot be executed while the Menu Screen is showing (except for the Title List).
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
1
There are three ways to start One Touch Dubbing.
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Method 1: Play the title you want to dub.When it comes to the point where you want to start dubbing from, press STOP C or PAUSE F. Then, press DUBBING HDD (c) DVD on the front panel. The dubbing will start from there to the end. * If there is not enough space left on the disc, the prohibited icon will appear and the dubbing will not be started. Method 2: Select the title you want to dub in the Original List or Playlist.With the title selected (highlighted), press DUBBING HDD (c) DVD on the front panel. Or, with the title selected (highlighted), press ENTER to call up the Title List Menu. And using / , select "Dubbing".Then press ENTER. * The dubbing will start from the beginning of the title to the end of the title. * When the disc runs out of the space, dubbing stops automatically. Method 3: If you press DUBBING HDD (c) DVD on the front panel in the stop mode without selecting anything, the unit will start dubbing the last title in the Original List or the Playlist. It will start dubbing the title in the Original List if the Original List was the last selected list. It will start dubbing the title in the Playlist if the Playlist was the last selected list.
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
DUBBING HDD (c) DVD STOP C
48
Recording / Dubbing One Touch Dubbing from HDD to DVD (Cont'd)
* If the title was in the resume stop mode, the dubbing will start from www..com the resume point to the end. * If the title was in the regular stop mode, the dubbing will start from the beginning of the title to the end. * If there is not enough space left on the disc, the prohibited icon will appear and the dubbing will not be started.
Before you start
Note for dubbing from HDD to DVD
* You cannot switch the device mode except between DVD and VCR during HDD to DVD dubbing. * High speed dubbing is not available for the One Touch Dubbing.
Connections Initial Setups
Dubbing Title 1 : 00 :56 (XP)
Dubbing XP
HDD
DVD
Recording / Dubbing
2
The dubbing will stop automatically when it reaches the end of the title. If you want to stop the dubbing manually, follow the following instructions below.
To stop the dubbing in preparation mode: * Press DVD, then press STOP C. Playback To stop the dubbing in progress: * Press DVD, then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or press STOP C on the front panel.
Editing
C
Dubbing XP
HDD
DVD
Other Setups VCR functions
Dubbing XP
HDD
DVD
Others
This operation may take a while to be completed.
Espanol
49
Recording / Dubbing One Touch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
With One Touch Dubbing feature, you can start dubbing right away with just one touch. * Recordable DVD must be in the unit. (See pages 29-31.) * There should be enough space on the recording DVD. * A videotape to be dubbed must be in the unit. * Recording Format (VR or Video) and the Rec Mode must be selected before recording. * Make sure to press the corresponding Device Select Button before using the device of your choice. Limitations: * You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs. * You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs. * If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped. * Copy-once programs which are recorded directly from the TV can be dubbed to the HDD/DVD. * Copy-once programs which are copied from the HDD/DVD to a videotape cannot be dubbed further from the videotape to the HDD/DVD. * If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing cannot be started. Be noted that with VCR to DVD dubbing, the unit recognize DVD's remaining time as the dubbing duration although the actual dubbing will end when the videotape ends. * You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the titles or the chapters of the disc is at its limit. * Dubbing cannot be executed during recording of any device. * Dubbing cannot be executed while the Menu Screen is showing (except for the Title List).
1 2
Play the contents you want to dub.When it comes to the point where you want to start dubbing from, press STOP C or PAUSE F. Press DUBBING VCR (c) DVD on the front panel. The dubbing will start.
F
Dubbing XP VCR DVD
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
DUBBING VCR (c) DVD
STOP C
I
Dubbing XP
VCR
DVD
50
Recording / Dubbing One Touch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD (Cont'd)
To stop the dubbing in preparation mode: * Press DVD, then press STOP C. www..com To stop the dubbing in progress: * Press DVD, then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or press STOP C on the front panel.
Before you start Connections
C
Dubbing XP
VCR
DVD
Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing XP
VCR
DVD
This operation may take a while to be completed.
Playback
Note for Dubbing from VCR to DVD
* When dubbing starts, the video image may be distorted because of the Digital Tracking function. This is not a malfunction. Play the videotape until the image clears up and then, start the dubbing. * Playback audio is determined by the setting you make in `Setting the Playback audio' section on page 127. * Dubbing takes as much time as the playback does. * You can not switch the device mode except between HDD and DVD. Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
51
Recording / Dubbing Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
You can copy the contents of the HDD / DVD to a videotape. Limitations: * If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped. * If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a confirmation message asking if you really want to continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with HDD / DVD to VCR dubbing, the duration of the dubbing is the duration of the dubbing title. * An error message will appear if you try to add a program to the Dubbing List when the total playback time of all the programs in the Dubbing List exceeds 10 hours and 30 minutes. Limitation (DVD to VCR): * Only the contents of the VR mode DVDs or the Video mode DVDs made on this unit can be dubbed. Any other discs cannot be dubbed. Preparing for dubbing: * Insert a recordable videotape with a record tab intact. * Make sure that the videotape has enough space to record the contents. * Make sure the desired Rec Mode (SP/SLP) is selected on the VCR in advance. (See page 122.) (You can change the Rec Mode during dubbing also.) Preparing for dubbing (DVD to VCR): * If you are dubbing from a disc, insert a disc to be dubbed.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
1
Press DUBBING MENU. The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
DUBBING
Dubbing Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD
OPEN / CLOSE
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
VCR
POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY REC/OTR CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD STOP PLAY HDD REC/OTR DVD
High XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
STOP/EJECT C A
2
52
Using / , select "HDD (c)VCR" for HDD to VCR dubbing. Press ENTER. Using / , select "DVD (c)VCR" for DVD to VCR dubbing. Press ENTER. Dubbing Top Menu will appear. Example: HDD (c) VCR
Recording / Dubbing Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape (Cont'd)
DUBBING
Before you start
www..com
Direction HDD VCR
Dubbing List
6 7
Repeat the steps 4 to 5 until you select all programs to be dubbed. After selecting all the programs you want, press RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu. Or press ENTER to call up the option window and select "Decide". Then press ENTER to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
DUBBING
Connections
Select Prog am Program Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
Dubbing List
Initial Setups
3
Direction HDD
VCR
2 Title 2 4 Title 4
Using / , select "Select Program". Press ENTER. Program List will appear.
DUBBING
Select Prog am Program Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
Program List (Or am (Original)
Dubbing List
1 Title 1 2 Title 2 3 Title 3 4 Title 4 5 Title 5 6 Title 6 7 Title 7 8 Title 8
Start Dubbing? Star Dub
Recording / Dubbing
8
Using / , select "Dubbing Start". Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Playback
Yes
No
4
Using / , select a desired program. Press ENTER. Program List Menu will appear.
Add to Dub Dubbing List. Playlist Pla Decide
9
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Dubbing will start.
Editing
5
Using / , select "Add to Dubbing List.". Press ENTER. The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
DUBBING
HDD SP
VCR Dubbing Dubbing
Other Setups
Program List (Or am (Original)
Dubbing List
* It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing. To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing preparation mode: * Press VCR first, then press STOP C. Or, press STOP/EJECT C A on the front panel. To stop the dubbing in progress: * Press VCR first, then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or, press STOP/EJECT C A on the front panel.
1 Title 1 2 Title 2 3 Title 3 4 Title 4 5 Title 5 6 Title 6 7 Title 7 8 Title 8
2 Title 2
VCR functions
* If you want to select programs from the Playlist, select "Playlist" and press ENTER to call up the Playlist.Then follow the steps 4 to 5. (Be noted that Original List programs and the Playlist programs can not be entered together in one Dubbing List.) * If more than one program is already in the Dubbing List, a green line will appear in the Dubbing List. Using / move the line to the position you want to insert the program, then press ENTER.The program is now inserted in the selected position.
Note for Dubbing from HDD / DVD to Videotape
* You can not change the device mode between VCR and HDD / DVD during the HDD / DVD to VCR dubbing.
Others Espanol
53
Recording / Dubbing Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
You can copy the contents of the HDD to a DVD, or vice versa. Limitations: * If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing cannot be started. Be noted that with HDD to DVD dubbing (or vice versa), the duration of the dubbing is the duration of the dubbing title (except for the High Speed Dubbing). Limitations (HDD to DVD): * You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs. * You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs. * If you try to dub copy-once programs, you will be warned that the copy-once programs cannot be copied but only be moved. If you still want to continue with the dubbing (moving), select "Yes" and continue with the steps. Moving of the copy-once programs is only available with VR mode DVD-RW (CPRM compatible) discs. * An error message will appear if you try to add a program to the Dubbing List under the following conditions; - When the number of programs in the "Dubbing List" exceeds 32 programs. - When the total number of titles in the DVD will exceed 99 titles. - When the total number of chapters in the DVD will exceed 999 chapters for VR mode DVDs. Limitations (DVD to HDD): * If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped. * The contents of the Video mode DVDs recorded on other unit cannot be dubbed using this unit. * An error message will appear if you try to add a program to the Dubbing List under the following conditions; - When the total number of titles will exceed 300 titles.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
High Speed Dubbing When dubbing from the HDD Original List to the VR mode DVD-RW, High Speed Dubbing will be available. High Speed Dubbing offers you the dubbing speed of 20 times the SEP mode dubbing.To perform the High Speed Dubbing, select "High" at step 3. Just Dubbing When dubbing from HDD to DVD if you select "Auto" in the Rec Mode Menu, the unit will calculate the duration of the dubbing material and the remaining time in the disc and automatically select the most suitable Rec Mode for the dubbing.
Preparing for dubbing (HDD to DVD): * Insert a recordable DVD. (See page 29.) * Make sure there is enough space on the DVD. * Recording Format (VR or Video) must be selected before recording. Preparing for dubbing (DVD to HDD): * Insert a disc to be dubbed. * Make sure there is enough space on the HDD.
54
Recording / Dubbing Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD (Cont'd)
Before you start
1
www..com
DUBBING
Press DUBBING MENU. The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
Dubbing Direction Rec Mode
5
Using / , select a desired program. Press ENTER. Program List Menu will appear.
Add to Dubbing List. Dubbing Playlist Pla Decide
Connections
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD VCR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
High XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
6
Using / , select "Add to Dubbing List.". Press ENTER. The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
DUBBING
Initial Setups
2
Using / , select "HDD (c) DVD" for HDD to DVD dubbing. Press ENTER. Using / , select "DVD (c) HDD" for DVD to HDD dubbing. Press ENTER. Example: HDD (c) DVD
DUBBING
Program List (Or am (Original)
Dubbing List Dub
1 Title 1 2 Title 2 3 Title 3 4 Title 4 5 Title 5 6 Title 6 7 Title 7 8 Title 8
2 Title 2
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD VCR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
High XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
3
Using / , select a desired Rec Mode. Press ENTER. Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
DUBBING
* If you want to select programs from the Playlist, select "Playlist" and press ENTER to call up the Playlist.Then follow the steps 5 and 6. (Be noted that Original List programs and the Playlist programs can not be entered together in one Dubbing List.) * If more than one program is already in the Dubbing List, a green line will appear in the Dubbing List. Using / move the line to the position you want to insert the program, then press ENTER.The program is now inserted in the selected position.
Playback Editing
Dubbing List
Direction HDD
DVD DVD
7 8
Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until you select all programs to be dubbed. After selecting all the programs you want, press RETURN to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu. Or press ENTER to call up the option window and select "Decide".Then press ENTER to go back to the Dubbing Top Menu.
DUBBING
Mode
XP
Other Setups
Select Prog am Program Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
* If you select "Auto" for the Rec Mode, the unit will automatically calculate the remaining time and select the most suitable Rec Mode (HDD to DVD dubbing only). * High Speed Dubbing is available only when dubbing the titles in the HDD Original List to the VR mode DVD.
VCR functions
Dubbing List Dub
Direction HDD
DVD DVD
2 Title 2 4 Title 4
Mode
XP
Select Prog am Program
4
Using / , select "Select Program". Press ENTER. Program List will appear.
DUBBING
Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
Others
Program List (Or am (Original)
Dubbing List
1 Title 1 2 Title 2 3 Title 3 4 Title 4 5 Title 5 6 Title 6 7 Title 7 8 Title 8
Espanol
55
Recording / Dubbing Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD (Cont'd)
9
www..com Press ENTER.
Using
/
, select "Dubbing Start".
Note
* When dubbing from HDD to DVD (or vice versa), even if the selected Rec Mode is set to the higher quality than that of the material to be dubbed, the program will not be recorded in the higher quality. It only protects the current picture quality. * You cannot switch the device mode between HDD and DVD during the bi-directional dubbing between HDD and DVD. * When you dub a copy-once program from HDD to DVD, it will be MOVED to the disc (not copied) and the original data will be erased from the HDD.
Confirmation window will appear.
Start Dubbing? Star Dub Yes No
10
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Dubbing will start. Preparing for the dubbing
Dubbing Title 1 : 00 :56 (XP)
Note on the High Speed Dubbing
* Duration of the High Speed Dubbing will depend on the Rec Mode, the length, the disc type of the material to be dubbed. * High speed Dubbing is available only when dubbing the titles in the HDD Original List to the VR mode DVD.
Dubbing XP
HDD
DVD
Dubbing XP
HDD
DVD
* It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing. * During High Speed Dubbing, the playback picture will not appear. To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing preparation mode: * Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first (for example, if you are dubbing to DVD, press DVD first), then press STOP C. To stop the dubbing in progress: * Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first (for example, if you are dubbing to DVD, press DVD first). Then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or, press STOP C on the front panel.
56
Recording / Dubbing Bi-Directional Dubbing between HDD and DVD (Cont'd) Deleting a Program from the www..com Dubbing List Changing the Order of the Dubbing List
Before you start Connections
1
If you are in the Dubbing Top Menu, select "Select Program", and press ENTER. Program / Dubbing List will appear. If you are already in the Program / Dubbing List, proceed to step 2. Press to move to the Dubbing List.
1
If you are in the Dubbing Top Menu, select "Select Program", and press ENTER. Program / Dubbing List will appear. If you are already in the Program / Dubbing List Screen, proceed to step 2. Press to move to the Dubbing List.
2 3
Using / , select a program you want to delete, then press ENTER. Dubbing List Menu will appear.
2 3
Initial Setups
Using / , select a program you want to move, then press ENTER. Dubbing List Menu will appear.
Recording / Dubbing
Delete from Dubbing List. Dubbing Position Change osition Decide
Delete from Dubbing List. Dubbing Position Change osition Decide
4 5
Using / , select "Delete from Dubbing List.". Press ENTER. The program is now deleted. Press RETURN Menu. to go back to the Dubbing Top
4 5
Using / , select "Position Change". Press ENTER. The selected program will be replaced by a single line. Using / , move the line to the desired position, then press ENTER. The program is now inserted in the selected position.
Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
57
Recording / Dubbing Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
You can copy the contents of a videotape to HDD or DVD disc. Limitation: * If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the dubbing will be stopped. Limitations (VCR to HDD): * If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a confirmation message asking if you really want to continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with VCR to HDD dubbing, the unit recognize the HDD's remaining time as the dubbing duration.The maximum possible duration is 10 hours and 30 minutes. Limitations (VCR to DVD): * You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs. * You cannot dub to the protected VR mode DVDs. * Copy-once programs which are recorded directly from the TV can be dubbed to the HDD and CPRM compatible VR mode DVD-RW. * Copy-once programs which are copied from the HDD/DVD to a videotape cannot be dubbed further from the videotape to the HDD/DVD. * If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a confirmation message asking if you really want to continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with VCR to DVD dubbing, the unit recognize DVD's remaining time as the dubbing duration although the actual dubbing will end when the videotape ends. Preparing for dubbing : * Insert a videotape to be dubbed. Preparing for dubbing (VCR to HDD): * Make sure there is enough space on the HDD. Preparing for dubbing (VCR to DVD): * Insert a recordable DVD. (See page 29.) * Make sure there is enough space on the DVD. * Recording Format (VR or Video) must be selected before recording.
58
Recording / Dubbing Dubbing from Videotape to HDD / DVD (Cont'd)
Press VCR first.
www..com
Before you start
1 2
6
Press PLAY B to start playback of the videotape, and press STOP C when it reaches the point you want to start dubbing. Press DUBBING MENU. The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
DUBBING
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Dubbing will start.
Connections Initial Setups
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD VCR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
High XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing preparation mode: * Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first (for example, if you are dubbing to DVD, press DVD first), then press STOP C. To stop the dubbing in progress: * Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first (for example, if you are dubbing to DVD, press DVD first). Then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds. Or press STOP C on the front panel.
Recording / Dubbing
Note
3
Using / , select "VCR (c) HDD" for HDD dubbing. Press ENTER. Using / , select "VCR (c) DVD" for DVD dubbing. Press ENTER. Example:VCR (c) HDD
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
HDD DVD VD HDD VCR DVD VD VCR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
XP SP LP EP SLP SEP
* The device mode change is available only between HDD and DVD during the videotape to the HDD / DVD dubbing. * After starting dubbing, the picture may be distorted because of the digital tracking function.This is not a malfunction. Be advised to playback the videotape until the picture is stabilized, then set the starting point at which you wish to start recording, and start dubbing. * Playback audio is determined by the setting you make in the `Setting the Playback audio' section on page 127.
Playback Editing
4
Using / , select a desired Rec Mode. Press ENTER. Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
DUBBING
Other Setups
Dubbing List Dub
Direction VCR
HDD
VCR functions
Mode
XP
Dubbing Start Dubbing Star
5
With "Dubbing Start" selected, press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Start Dubbing? Star Dub Yes No
Others Espanol
59
Recording / Dubbing Settings for the External Devices
VR Video
HDD DVD-RW DVD-RW www..com
DVD-R
VCR
Connect the external source properly to the unit by using input jacks either LINE2 (Front) or LINE1 (Rear). When connecting an external equipment of monaural output to this unit, use AUDIO L jack of LINE 1 (Rear) or LINE2 (Front). Use commercially available S-Video or Video cable and an Audio cable for this type of connection.
OUTPUT S- VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R
External Device (VCR camcorder etc.)
OUTPUT S- VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R
or
S-Video cable Video cable Audio cable S-Video cable
or
Video cable Audio cable
HDD/DVD S-VIDEO
HDD/DVD/VCR AUDIO IN L
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
HDD/DVD/VCR
R
IN
VIDEO IN
To LINE 2 IN
OPEN / CLOSE
or
PLAY
To LINE 1 IN
HDD/DVD
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
HDD/DVD
POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
AUDIO OUT L
HDD/DVD/VCR HDD/DVD/VCR
VCR DVD
RESET
PB/CB IN IN
R
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COAXIAL R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
HDD DVD
PR/CR OUT OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD HDD/DVD
Front of this unit
Rear of this unit
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. If "Advanced Menu" is displayed, proceed to step 3. Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
Easy Setting Menu DVD Menu enu HDD MENU HDD Menu enu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
5
Using / , select "Select Video". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Select Video L1 (Rear) L2 (Front)
6
Advanced Menu
2 3
Using / , select "Advanced Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup Timer Program Record Display Easy Setting Menu Reset to factory default OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback
Using / ,select the external input ;"L1" (Rear) or "L2" (Front). * If you are using the jacks on the rear,select "L1". * If you are using the jacks on the front,select "L2". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
L1 (Rear) Video In S-Video In
Advanced Menu
7 8
Using / , select the video input type you use, Video or S-Video, then press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. * The default setting is "Video In". Press SETUP to exit.
4
Using / , select "Display". Press ENTER. Display Menu will appear.
Display Displa Select Video FL Dimmer Screen Sa Saver
60
Recording / Dubbing Dubbing from the External Devices
VR Video
Before you start
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
VCR
Before recording from an external device, connect the external device correctly by following the direction on page 60, and turn the power of the unit and the external device on.
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1 2
CLEAR
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input channel. (See page 18.) Select the recording media. Recording to HDD: Press HDD first. Recording to DVD: Press DVD first and insert a disc. (It may take a while to load the disc.) Recording to a videotape: Press VCR and insert a videotape. Select the appropriate external input channel of this unit by pressing INPUT SELECT. You also can use CHANNEL / . * If you are using the jacks on the front set the channel to L2. * If you are using the jacks on the rear set the channel to L1. Select a Rec Mode by pressing REC MODE. Refer to `Rec Mode' on page 30 for HDD/DVD or page 122 for VCR. Press REC/OTR (of the recording device,) on the unit to start recording. Press PLAY button on the external device to record from. For HDD or DVD: Press STOP C on the recording unit (this unit) first to stop recording. This operation may take a while to be completed. Then, stop the external device. For VCR: Press STOP / EJECT C A on the recording unit (this unit) first to stop recording. Then, stop the external device.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
3
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
4 5 6 7
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Other Setups VCR functions
REC/OTR (VCR)
REC/OTR (HDD/DVD) Others
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
Note
POWER STOP / EJECT C A STOP C * To avoid mistakes, it is recommended to use the buttons on the front panel to operate. * Read also the instructions for the external device thoroughly. Espanol
61
Recording / Dubbing Protecting a Disc
VR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
DVD-RW
To prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the titles, you can protect the whole disc.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Easy Setting Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2 3
Using
/
, select "DVD Menu". Press ENTER.
Using / , select "Disc Protect". Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Protect this disc? Yes No
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
* If the disc has already been protected, "Disc Undo Protect" will be listed in the menu instead of "Disc Protect".To undo the disc protection, select "Disc Undo Protect" and press ENTER.
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Using / select "Yes". Then press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
Are y sure? you Yes No
5
Using / , select "YES". Press ENTER. The disc will be protected.
Disc Protect
This operation may take a while to be completed.
Note
* Disc Protect is available only with VR mode DVDs.
62
Recording / Dubbing Finalizing a Disc
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before you start
Finalize
VR Video
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
You must first finalize the disc before playing it back on other unit.
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
DVD Menu HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup
DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2 3
Using / ENTER.
, select "DVD Menu", then press
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Using / , select "Finalize", then press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear. Playback
Finalize disc? e Yes No
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
* If the disc has already been finalized, "Undo finalize" will be listed in the menu instead of "Finalize" (DVD-RW only).To Undo the finalization of the disc, select "Undo Finalize" and press ENTER.
Editing
4
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear. Other Setups
Are y sure? you Yes No
5
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. A progress bar will appear, and finalizing will start. * If you want to stop the process, press ENTER.
VCR functions Others
Finalize Finaliz
Cancel
Note
* If
appears when pressing ENTER, that means the finalizing process has reached the critical point, and cannot be stopped.
This operation may take a while to be completed. Finalizing ends when the progress bar reaches the right end.
Espanol
* You cannot cancel finalizing the DVD-R disc once it has started.
63
Recording / Dubbing Finalizing a Disc (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Auto Finalize
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
This feature allows you to set the unit to automatically finalize the disc at the specified timing when dubbing to the Video mode DVDs.This feature is available only with the Video mode DVDs.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. Example: DVD-R (Advanced Menu)
Advanced Menu DVD Menu DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
HDD MENU HDD Menu Initial Setup Initial Setup
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Timer Program
Advanced Menu
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Using
/
, select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record Display
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Advanced Menu
REV
PLAY
FWD
HDD Menu Initial Setup
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
* If you are using the "Easy Setting Menu", skip to step 4.
3
Using / , select "Record". Press ENTER. Record Menu will appear.
Record Playback Pla Auto Finaliz uto Finalize Record Auto Chapter uto
4
Using / , select "Auto Finalize". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Auto Finalize Disc Full End of Timer Rec End of Dubbing
Disc Full :The unit automatically finalizes the disc when it becomes full during recording. End of Timer Rec :The unit automatically finalizes the disc when all the Timer Recordings to a DVD are completed. End of Dubbing :The unit automatically finalizes the disc when a dubbing or One Touch Dubbing to a DVD is completed and when there is no Timer Recording in standby.
64
Recording / Dubbing Finalizing a disc (Cont'd)
Before you start
5
www..com disc. Press ENTER.
Using
/
, select the desired timing to finalize the
Option window will appear. Example: Disc Full
Disc Full On Off
Connections Initial Setups
6 7
Using / , select "On". Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. Press SETUP to exit.
Recording / Dubbing
Note
* Although finalization is recommended, you may be able to play the VR mode discs on other unit without finalizing.With regard to the Video mode discs, you MUST finalize them before playing them back on other unit. * After DVD-R discs are finalized: - A DVD Menu is created automatically. - Undoing the finalization is not possible. - Additional recording or editing is not possible. * After Video mode DVD-RW discs are finalized: - A DVD Menu is created automatically. - Undoing the finalization is possible. - Additional recording or editing is possible if you undo finalize. * After VR mode DVD-RW discs are finalized: - A DVD Menu is not created. - Undoing the finalization is possible. - Additional recording or editing is possible even without undoing the finalization. * When DVD Menu is created Title List will no longer be available.
Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
65
Playback Playback Information
Before you play back DVD discs, read the following information. www..com
Color systems
DVDs are recorded in different color systems throughout the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which is used primarily in the United States and Canada). This unit uses NTSC, you must use DVDs recorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back DVDs recorded in other color systems.
Playable discs This unit is compatible with the following discs.
To play back a DVD, make sure that it meets the requirements for region codes and color systems described in this section. Discs with the following logos can be played back on the unit. Playback of other disc types is not guaranteed.
Disc DVD-VIDEO DVD-RW (VIDEO/VR mode) DVD-R (VIDEO mode) CD-DA (AUDIO CD) CD-RW (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files) Logo
Region codes
This unit has been designed to play back DVD discs with Region One (1). DVDs must be labeled for ALL regions or for Region 1. You cannot play back DVDs labeled for other regions. Look for the symbols below on your DVDs. If these region symbols are not on your DVD, you cannot play back the DVD on this unit.
The number inside the globe refers to region of the world. A DVD labeled for a specific region can only be played back on the unit with the same region code.
Playback of discs recorded in Video mode on a regular DVD player (Video mode)
Discs recorded in Video mode can be played back on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-Video Playback*. You will need to finalize the discs recorded in Video mode to play them back on other DVD players. * DVD-Video format (Video mode) is a new format for recording on DVD-RW/R discs that was approved by the DVD Forum in 2000. Adoption of this format is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback devices, and there are DVDVideo players, DVD-ROM drives or other DVD playback devices that do not play back DVD-RW/R discs recorded in the DVD-Video format.
CD-R (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 / WMA files)
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Play the recorded contents
You can select the title you want to play from the Title List.The Title List can easily be accessed by pressing TOP MENU. The recorded titles can also be called up by pressing PROGRAM RECORDINGS (HDD Original List only).
Start Rec. Stop/Start Stop Rec.
What are titles and chapters?
The contents on the HDD / DVD are generally divided into titles. Titles may be further divided into chapters.
Title 1
Title 2
What are Original List and Playlist?
Throughout this manual, you will find Original List and Playlist to refer to the Original content and the edited version. (See page 89.) * Original List refers to what's originally recorded on the disc. * Playlist refers to the edited version of the Original List content.
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2
66
Playback Basic Playback
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Direct Playback
VR Video
HDD CD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input channel. (See page 18.) * If you are playing the HDD, skip to step 4. Press OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray. The disc tray will open. Insert your disc with its label facing up. Align the Disc to the disc tray guide.
2 3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
disc tray guide
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Press OPEN / CLOSE A again to close the disc tray. * It may take a while to load the disc.
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Press PLAY B to start playback. Playback will start. * Depending on the media, the playback may start from a resume point. (See page 72.) * If you are playing back a DVD-Video, a Disc Menu may appear. Refer to page 70 for more details about the Disc Menu. Press STOP C to stop playback.
Other Setups
5
VCR functions
Note
* Some discs may start playback automatically.
Others Espanol
67
Playback Basic Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Playback from the Title List
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1 2
Follow steps 1-3 in `Direct Playback' on page 67. PressTOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/05 12:15PM MAY/01/05 12:15PM JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
JUN/15/05 11:05AM JUL/05/05 11:40PM JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary. * To exit the Title List, press TOP MENU.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
3
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using / / / , select a desired title, then press PLAY B. Playback will start. * Use / / / to move among the titles one by one, and use FWD D / REV E to jump to the next / previous Title List page. * For HDD, playback will start from the resume point. If you want to start it from the beginning, use the Title List Menu. Press STOP C to stop playback.
4
68
Playback Basic Playback (Cont'd) Playback from the Title List Menu
www..com
VR Video
Before You Start
Playback from the DVD Menu
Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Connections
(Not available for the DVD-Videos, the finalized Video mode DVDs, or the Video mode discs made on other unit) If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
1 2
Follow steps 1-3 in `Direct Playback' on page 67. PressTOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
With finalized Video mode DVDs or the Video mode DVDs made on other units, a DVD Menu may be contained instead of the Title List. DVD Menus are created automatically when you finalize a Video mode disc.With such discs,Title List is no longer available. Follow the steps below to play back a disc using the DVD Menu.
Press DVD first.
Initial Setups
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
1
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Insert a disc. DVD Menu may appear automatically. Otherwise press TOP MENU to call up the DVD Menu.
DVD Menu
Recording / Dubbing
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
1 CH 10 2 CH 10 3 CH 8
XP XP LP LP EP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary. * To exit the Title List, press TOP MENU.
4 CH 8 5 CH 8
Playback
3
Using / / / , select a desired title, then press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear. Example: HDD
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD DVD DVD HDD PL ORG PL ORG
Press STOP C if you want to exit from the menu. Editing
2 3
Using / , select a desired title. Press PLAY B or ENTER. Playback will start. Press STOP C to stop playback.
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
Other Setups
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
Note
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
* Operation may vary depending on the discs.
* Use / / / to move among the titles one by one, and use FWD D / REV E to jump to the next / previous Title List Page.
VCR functions
4
Using / , select "Play From Start" if you want to play the title from the beginning . Select "Resume Play" (HDD only) if you want to play the title from the point where it is stopped last time. Press ENTER. Playback will start. Press STOP C to stop the playback.
Others
5
Espanol
69
Playback Basic Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Playback from the Disc Menu
DVD-V
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Some DVD discs contain disc menus that describe the contents or allows you to customize the playback. For example, the menu may offer choices for subtitle languages, special features, or chapter selection. Some discs display them automatically when you insert the disc. For others, follow the steps below.
Press DVD first.
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
1
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Press MENU / LIST. The Disc Menu will appear. If the feature is not available, TV screen.
may appear on the
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Using / / / , select an item. Press ENTER to confirm. Continue this step to setup all the features you want or to start playing back the disc from the menu.
REV
PLAY
FWD
MENU / LIST:
Displays a DVD disc menu. It may be the same with the Title List.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Cursor ENTER:
/
/
/
:
Moves the cursor on the screen.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Selects the currently highlighted menu option.
Number Buttons:
Selects a numbered menu option (some discs only). You may have to press ENTER after.
3
Press MENU / LIST to exit the Disc Menu.
Note
* Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information accompanying the disc for details.
70
Playback Basic Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
Before You Start
Playing back MP3 / WMA Discs
MP3
WMA
Connections
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Press DVD first.
.@/: ABC DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
The MP3 / WMA Menu will appear automatically when you insert a disc. Or in stop mode, press TOP MENU to call up the MP3 / WMA List.
FILE LIST
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
DISC NAME FOLDER NAME 1 FOLDER NAME 2 FOLDER NAME 3 FOLDER NAME 4 FOLDER NAME 5 FOLDER NAME 6 1 FILE NAME 1 2 FILE NAME 2
1/2
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
* To exit the menu, press TOP MENU again.
2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press / to select a desired folder (group) or track. Press ENTER. Playback
When a track is selected:
REV PLAY FWD
Playback will start.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
When a folder is selected:
The files and the folders will appear. Press / to select a track or a folder you want, then press ENTER. * Press ENTER or FWD g to move to the lower level folders. to move back to the * Press REV E or RETURN upper level folders.
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Editing
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Other Setups
Hints for MP3 / WMA files:
* Folders are known as Groups, files are known as Tracks. * Folders are accompanied by icon. * The system can recognize up to 999 groups (or folders) per disc, and up to 999 tracks per disc. * The maximum displayable number of letters for the group or the track name varies depending on their names. Unrecognizable characters will be replaced with asterisks (*). * If there are not any playable files in the folder, the folder will not be displayed in the list. This unit recommends the files recorded under the following circumstances: * Sampling frequency: 44.1kHz or 48kHz. * Constant bit rate: 112kbps - 320kbps.
VCR functions
Note
* The audio source of MP3 / WMA files cannot be recorded as digital sound by an MD or DAT deck. * Files that bear an extension other than .mp3 or .wma (MP3 / WMA) will not appear in the MP3 / WMA Menu. * Some unplayable folders or tracks may appear in the MP3 / WMA Menu depending on their recording status.
Others Espanol
71
Playback Special Playback
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Resume Playback
VR Video
HDD CD
.@/: ABC DEF
DVD-RW
MP3
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
WMA
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
You can resume playback from where you stopped last time. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR TOP MENU
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
During playback, press STOP C. Pressing STOP C twice will cancel the Resume function. Press PLAY B. Within a few seconds, playback will resume from the point at which it stopped last. Resume function stays in effect even if you turn off the power.
MENU/LIST
2
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
For HDD:You can set a resume point per every title. * If you play back from the Title List Menu, you can choose "Play From Start" or "Resume Play". Otherwise the playback will start from the resume point of the last played title. * Press STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to set a resume point. In this case, next time you press PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning of the last title in the Title List. For DVDs:You can set only one resume point per disc. * If a resume point is set, the playback will start from the resume point next time you press PLAY B. * Press STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to set a resume point. In this case, next time you press PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning of the first title in the Title List. For CD, or MP3/WMA:You can set only one resume point per disc. * If a resume point is set, the playback will start from the resume point next time you press PLAY B if you are playing a CD. As to the MP3/WMA files, the resume playback will start from the beginning of the track last played. * Press STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to set a resume point. In this case, next time you press PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning of the disc.
Note
* Resume point will be lost when you; -Open/Close the disc tray. -Switch Original List and Playlist.
72
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Fast forward / Fast reverse
VR Video
HDD CD
.@/: ABC DEF
DVD-RW
MP3
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
Connections
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
During playback, press FWD D or REV E. Every time you press FWD D or REV E, approximate speed will change as follows.
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
press button : +1 : -1 speed (HDD/DVD)
-3
-2
-1
0 Normal speed Normal speed Normal speed
+1
+2
+3
Recording / Dubbing
x40 -
x20 -
x1 x8 x16
x1.5 x8 x16
x20 -
x40 -
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
speed (CD) speed (MP3) OSD indication
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
For HDD / DVD discs : Sound will be output only during x1.5 fast forward if you set "Fast Forward with Audio" to "On" in the Setup Menu, otherwise the sound will be muted. For Audio CDs : approximate speed is fixed at x8 with sound. For MP3 files : approximate speed is fixed at x16. * To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B. * Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles (for DVD discs) or tracks (for MP3) is not possible. * Fast forward or fast reverse is not available for WMA files.
Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
73
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Slow forward / Slow reverse Playback
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1 2
CLEAR TOP MENU
During playback, press PAUSE k. Press FWD D or REV E. Every time you press FWD D or REV E, approximate speed will change as follows. The sound will remain muted.
press button : +1 : -1
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
-3
-2
-1
0 Normal speed
+1
+2
+3
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
speed (HDD/DVD) OSD indication
x1/4
x1/8
x1/16
x1/16
x1/8
x1/2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
* To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B.
SLOW STOP PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
74
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Time Shift Playback
HDD
Connections
You can playback a title being recorded from the beginning while recording continues.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Press HDD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
Press PLAY B during recording. Playback of the title you are recording will start from the beginning. * Elapsed playback time will be displayed in the Front Panel Display. To stop the playback, press STOP C ONCE. * The Front Panel Display will switch back to show the elapsed recording time. IMPORTANT: If you press STOP C twice, it will stop the recording.
Initial Setups
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
2
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Simultaneous Playback and Recording
VR Video
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
HDD
VCR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
You can play back a title on one device while making a recording on other device. To do so, simply select the device you like to use for the playback by pressing the device select button (HDD, DVD, or VCR) during recording, and then follow the normal procedure of playback. Only in regard to the HDD, you can playback a title in the same device (HDD). To do so, pressTOP MENU during recording and select a title you like to play, and then press PLAY B. To playback a title being recorded while continuing to record, refer to `Time Shift Playback' on this page.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
75
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Pause
VR Video
HDD CD
.@/: ABC DEF
DVD-RW
MP3
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
WMA
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
During playback, press PAUSE F. Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
F
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
2
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Press PLAY B to resume play.
Step-by-Step Playback
VR Video
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
REV
PLAY
FWD
1
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
During playback, press PAUSE F. Playback will pause and the sound will be muted.
F
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
2
Press SKIP Hor G repeatedly. Every time you press SKIP H or G, the playback will go backward or forward one frame at a time. Press and hold SKIP H or G to advance or to reverse continuously. Press PLAY B to resume normal playback.
3
Variable Replay / Variable Skip
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
During playback, you can skip forward or backward by the amount of time you set in the Setup Menu with just one touch. To set the time amount, refer to `6. Variable Replay / Skip Speed' on page 116.
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
Press VARIABLE SKIP if you want to skip forward. Press VARIABLE REPLAY if you want to skip backward. 76
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Zoom
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear. Example: DVD-Video
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
?
SEARCH
NR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER. Option window will appear. Playback
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
?
x 1. 2 x 1. 5 x 2. 0
NR
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
There are four options (x1.0, x1.2, x1.5 and x2.0), which will be displayed excluding the current zoom rate.
Other Setups
3
Using / , select a desired zoom factor to zoom. Press ENTER. The zoom box will be displayed.
VCR functions Others * If you want to go back to the previous screen and reselect the the zoom factor, press RETURN .
Note
* When selecting a smaller factor than the current one, the zoom box will not be displayed. * To cancel the zoom, select "x1.0" using / , then press ENTER.
4
Using / / / , move the zoom box to the area you want to zoom. Press ENTER. The selected area is zoomed.
Espanol
77
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Repeat Playback
VR Video
HDD CD
.@/: ABC DEF
DVD-RW
MP3
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
WMA
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
CLEAR
7
8
SPACE
9
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear. Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
?
MENU/LIST TOP MENU
SEARCH
NR
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
?
REV PLAY FWD
Off
NR
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Program Chapter Disc
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
A-B
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
* The A-B Repeat playback can only be set within the current title (for DVDs), or current track (for Audio CDs). * To cancel the repeat playback, select "Off " at step 3. The Repeat Setting will be also cleared when you stop playback. * Group Repeat is not available during the Random Playback.
Using / , select a desired option for repeat playback. Press ENTER. The selected repeat playback will start. Program: (HDD/DVD only) (Not available during Time Shift Playback) The current title will be played back repeatedly. Chapter: (HDD/DVD only) (Not available during Time Shift Playback) The current chapter will be played back repeatedly. Disc: (CD, MP3 / WMA,VR mode DVD-RW disc only) The current disc will be played back repeatedly. A-B: (HDD/DVD/CD only) The part between the point A and B will be played back repeatedly. 1.Using / , select "A-B", then press ENTER. 2.Play back the title up to the point where you want to set point "A".Then, press ENTER. 3.Play back the title up to the point where you want to set point "B".Then, press ENTER. The A-B Repeat Setting is now activated. Track: (CD, MP3 / WMA only) The current track will be played back repeatedly. Group: (MP3 / WMA only) The current group will be played back repeatedly.
3
78
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Random Playback
CD
MP3
WMA
Connections
You can play back a disc randomly instead of playing back in the original order.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu enu HDD Menu enu DVD Recording Format
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Initial Setup Timer Program
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
CD
Recording / Dubbing
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Using / , select "CD". Press ENTER. Example: CD
Advanced Menu DVD Menu enu Random Play Program Play
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
HDD Menu enu Initial Setup
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Timer Program
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
CD Easy Setting Menu
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3
Using / , select "Random Play". Press ENTER. Random Playback will start.
Other Setups
Note
* To cancel Random Playback, press STOP C twice during Random Playback.
VCR functions Others Espanol
79
Playback Special Playback (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Program Playback
CD
You can program a playback sequence in your desired order.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu enu HDD Menu enu Initial Setup Timer Program DVD Recording Format
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
CD Easy Setting Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Using
/
, select "CD". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu enu HDD Menu enu Random Play Program Play
Advanced Menu
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Initial Setup Timer Program
REV
PLAY
FWD
CD Easy Setting Menu
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
3
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Using / select "Program Play". Press ENTER. Program Play Screen will appear.
PROGRAM PLAY
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Total
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0:00:00
9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
4
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a desired track. Press ENTER or . A cursor will move to the next.
PROGRAM PLAY
Total
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0:06:11
9 10
09
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Note
* To erase tracks you entered, select the track and then press CLEAR. * You can make up to 50 program settings. * To cancel Program Playback, press STOP C twice during Program Playback. * The program will remain memorized unless you open / close the disc tray or turn off the power.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
5
Press PLAY B to start Program Playback. Program Playback will start. * When you enter a single digit number using the Number Buttons, press the number directly without pressing 0 first.
80
Playback Search
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Title / Chapter Search
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Using SKIP H / G
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
During playback, press SKIP G to skip to the next title or chapter. Press SKIP H once to skip back to the beginning of the current title or chapter. Press SKIP H twice to skip back to the previous title or chapter.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Using DISPLAY
1 2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear. Using / , select ? icon. Press ENTER. The title number next to T will be highlighted.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
?
SEARCH
NR
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Title:
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a desired title number to search. Then, press ENTER. Title Search will start.
Other Setups
Chapter:
Using , move to C for chapter. Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a desired chapter number to search. Then, press ENTER. Chapter Search will start. .
VCR functions
Note
* In Search Mode Display, total numbers of each search contents (title / chapter / time) are shown as a denominator.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
Others
?
SEARCH
NR
Current title number / Total number of titles Current chapter number / Total number of chapters
Elapsed time of the current title / Total time of the current title
Espanol
81
Playback Search (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Track Search
CD
MP3
WMA
Press DVD first.
.@/: ABC DEF
Using SKIP H / G
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
During playback, press SKIP i to skip to the next track. Press SKIP j once to skip back to the beginning of the current track. Press SKIP j twice to skip back to the previous track.
Using DISPLAY
MENU/LIST TOP MENU
1
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear. Using / , select ? icon. Press ENTER. The track number next to T will be highlighted. Example: CD
DVD MODE T 1 / 13 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
?
SLOW STOP PAUSE
SEARCH
REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
3
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a desired track number to search. Press ENTER. Track Search will start.
82
Playback Search (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Time Search
VR Video
HDD CD
.@/: ABC DEF
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
Connections
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
CLEAR
7
8
SPACE
9
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear. Using / , select ? icon. Press ENTER. The number next to T will be highlighted. Example: DVD
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
?
ENTER
NR
SEARCH
DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
3
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Move the cursor to the elapsed time counter using . When Time Search is not available, "--:--:-- / --:--:--" ("0:00:00 / 0:00:00" for CD) is displayed instead of time count. Elapsed time counter
Playback
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DVD MODE T
DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE
1/1 C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
SEARCH
NR
Other Setups
4
Using / or the Number Buttons, enter a desired time to search. Press ENTER. Time Search will start.
VCR functions
Note
* Time Search is available only within the same track or title.
Others Espanol
83
Playback Search (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Series Search
HDD
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
You can search for the group of titles made with the same Periodical Timer Recordings.We refer to such a group of titles as "series".This feature is available only with the HDD. Press HDD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
7
8
SPACE
9
CH12
XP
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
APR/01/05 12:15PM
1 2
1
2
3
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
2
REV
PLAY
FWD
Using / , select any title that belongs to the series you want to search and press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
Play From Star rom Start Resume Pla Play Protect
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Delete Edit
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Dubbing Dub Search
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3
Using / , select "Search". Press ENTER. Series List will appear.
Select Ser Series 001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8 002 Mon-Sun 10:00AM CH 8 No Series Series
1/1
Highlight will be on the series that contains the selected title.
84
Playback Search (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
Using
/
, select the desired series. Press
Title List of the selected series will appear. Connections
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
6
8
9
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
JUL/25/05 10:00AM
AUG/01/05 10:00AM
12
16
20
Initial Setups
AUG/08/05 10:00AM
AUG/15/05 10:00AM
AUG/22/05 10:00AM
5
Using / / / , select a desired title to play, then press PLAY B. Or press ENTER to call up the Title List Menu and select your desired playback style. To show the regular Title List, select "Display All Program" from the Title List Menu.Then press ENTER.
Recording / Dubbing
1
Select Series 001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8 002 Mon-Sun 10:00AM CH 8 No Series
Playback
2 3
Editing
1/1
4 Other Setups
1
2
3
4
Series List * Up to 8 series can be displayed on 1 page. * The series that contains the oldest title comes first on the list. Information on the series. * Type of the Periodical Recording (ex. every Monday), start time, and the recording channel. (In the example here, the information tells you this series is recorded on every Monday, starting at 10:00 AM on channel 8.) No Series * All recordings which are not periodical fall into this category. * "No Series" will always be at the last on the list. Current page / Total number of pages. * Up to 38 pages (300 series) are available.
VCR functions Others
Note
* The unit exits the Series Search mode when you switch the list type or the device mode.
Espanol
85
Playback Selecting a Format of Audio and Video
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Switching Subtitles
VR
DVD-RW
DVD-V
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Many DVD-Video discs have subtitles in one or more languages. Available languages are usually written on their packages.You can switch subtitle languages anytime during playback. Available language vary among discs. Press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
AUDIO CLEAR TOP MENU
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
MENU/LIST
?
SEARCH
NR
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER. Subtitle Menu will appear.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REV
PLAY
FWD
?
SLOW STOP PAUSE
NR
Off
REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
1.English 2.Japanese
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
* If you are playing a VR mode DVD-RW disc, "Off " or "On" will be the only option.
3
Using / , select a desired subtitle language. Press ENTER. Subtitles will be displayed in the selected language. When selecting "Off ", subtitles will disappear.
Note
* Some discs will only allow you to change subtitles from the Disc Menu. Press MENU / LIST to display the Disc Menu. * If a 4-digit language code appears in the Subtitle Menu at step 2, refer to `Language Code' on page 135.
86
Playback Selecting a Format of Audio and Video (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Switching Audio Soundtrack
VR
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-V
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
When playing back a title recorded with two or more soundtracks (these are often in different languages), you can switch between them during playback. When playing back Audio CDs or MP3 / WMA files, you can switch among stereo, the left channel only and the right channel only. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
1
TOP MENU
During playback, press AUDIO to call up the available audio settings on the TV screen (see examples below). Example: DVD-Video
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
MENU/LIST
Recording / Dubbing
?
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
NR
1.Dolby Digital 2ch English 2.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English 3.Dolby Digital 2ch English
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Example: CD/ MP3/WMA Playback
DVD MODE T 1/1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REV
PLAY
FWD
?
SLOW STOP PAUSE
L/R L
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
R
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
2
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using / , select the desired setting, then press ENTER to activate the setting. As in the example below, if the title contains both main and sub audio, you can further select "L" (main), "R" (sub), or "L/R" ( mixed of main and sub). Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
Editing Other Setups
?
NR
1.Dolby Digital DUAL L
VCR functions
Press ENTER.
DVD MODE T
1/1 C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
Note
* Some discs will only allow you to change the soundtrack from the Disc Menu. Press TOP MENU to display the Disc Menu. * Although this unit cannot record both Stereo (main) and SAP(sub) at the same time, some VR mode DVDRW discs may contain both audio.With such discs, you can select either Main (L), Sub(R) or both (L+R) as your playback audio.
L/R L R
Others
Using / , select the desired setting, then press ENTER to activate the setting.
3
Press AUDIO to exit. DISPLAY button can also lead you to the AUDIO Menu. Simply press DISPLAY twice during playback to show the icons for the available features, then using / , select and press ENTER.
Espanol
87
Playback Selecting a Format of Audio and Video (Cont'd) Switching Camera Angles
www..com
DVD-V
Visual Noise Reduction
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
Some DVD-Videos contain the scenes shot from multiple angles. In those scenes you can change the camera angles by following the steps below. Changing angles is available only where scenes are shot from different angles. Press DVD first.
This feature allows you to reduce visual noise during playback. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
1
During playback, press DISPLAY twice. Icons for the available features will appear.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
SEARCH
NR
?
SEARCH
NR
.
2
If you set the Angle Icon Setting to "On" in the Setup Menu (see page 117), an angle icon will appear at the bottom right corner of the TV screen in scenes where different camera angles are available.
Using / , select NR icon. Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
DVD MODE T 1/1 C 1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
Off Type1 Type2
NR
2
Using / , select icon. Press ENTER. Angle will change each time you press ENTER.
Note
* will appear when Angle feature is not available.
Off: When playing back titles with a few noises such as DVD-Video discs. Type 1: For the titles recorded in long time mode such as SLP or SEP mode. Type 2: Same as type 1, only more effective.
3
Using / , select a desired option. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
88
Editing Information on Disc Editing Guide to the Title List
When you record programs to the HDD / DVD, a title list will be created.Title list is the thumbnails of the recorded programs (titles).You can call up the Title List by pressing TOP MENU and select the title of your choice from the list and can play or edit it from the Title List Menu. 1 Selected device (HDD or DVD) and selected list type (Original List or Playlist) 2 The number of the current Title List page / the total number of the Title List pages Use FWD D to jump to the next page.Use REV E to jump to the previous page. Use / to move among titles one by one. 3 Title name,recorded channel and Rec Mode (if the title name has not been assigned yet,the date and the time the recording was made,the recorded channel (Original List Titles in the HDD or VR mode DVDRW only),and the Rec Mode (Original List only) will be assigned as the title name automatically) 4 Thumbnails of the titles Only the highlighted thumbnail can be seen in motion. 5 Date and time the title was recorded. 6 Protected icon This icon appears only when the title is protected (Original List only). 7 Status bar 8 Preview window 9 Progress bar 10 Command bar
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
Before You Start
www..com
Connections
1
1 2
3 5
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
2 4
1
2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Initial Setups
4
5
6
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SCENE DELETING
HDD ORG
Recording / Dubbing
7 8
Start Point Return
0:00:00
9 10 Playback
What are Original List and Playlist?
There are 2 types for the title list:Original List and Playlist. Original List: Original List is the list of the recorded programs (titles) which are created automatically when they are recorded.Original List is available for HDD,DVD-RW,and DVD-R.Please note that editing the titles in the Original List is like editing the original data.For example, if you erase a title in the Original List, the title cannot be recovered.So,please be careful when you work in the Original List. Playlist: Playlist is the copy of the Original List.You can edit the titles in the Playlist as you like without affecting the Original data in the Original List.It works like a back up for the Playlist.Deleting a title from the Playlist does not delete the corresponding title in the Original List,but deleting a title from the Original List also deletes the corresponding title in the Playlist.With HDD and VR mode DVD-RW,the Playlist is created automatically.Playlist is available only for the HDD and the VR mode DVDs.There is no Playlist for the Video mode DVDs.
Editing Other Setups
Available Menus (o = Available, x = Not Available)
Media HDD Video Mode DVDs VR mode DVDs Page Description Original Playlist Original Original Playlist Play from Start o o o o o 69 To play from the beginning of the title. Resume Play o o x x x 72 To resume playback from the point where it is stopped last time. Protect/Undo Protect o x x o x 93 To protect/undo protect the title. Delete o o o o o 90-91 To delete a title. Edit o o o o o Dubbing o o x x x 48 To make copies. Search o o x x x 84-85 To search for the group of titles made with the same Periodical Timer Recordings. Protect/Undo Protect o x x o x 93 To protect/undo protect the title. Delete o o o o o 90-91 To delete a title. Edit Title Name o o o o o 94-95 Scene Delete o o x o o 96-97 To delete a part of the title. Divide x o x x o 98-99 To divide a title into two titles. Combine x o x x o 100-101 To combine two titles into one. Move x o x x o 102-103 To rearrange the order of the Title List. Chapter Marker o o x o o 104-107 To add/delete the chapter marks. Add To Playlist o o x o o 108-109 To add a title to the Playlist. Item
VCR functions
Title List Menu
Others
Edit Menu
Espanol
89
Editing Deleting Titles
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Deleting Selected Titles
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
[VIDEO] [VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore. Be advised that the titles once deleted cannot be recovered. With DVD-R discs, deleting titles will not affect the recordable disc space. With Video mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will increase only when the last title in the Original List is deleted. With VR mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will increase when any title in the Original List is deleted. Deleting a title in the Playlist will not delete the corresponding title in the Original List. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
1
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
REV
PLAY
FWD
1 2 3
1 2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
JUN/15/05 11:05AM JUL/05/05 11:40PM JUL/18/05 10:00AM
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to delete. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
90
Editing Deleting Titles (Cont'd)
Before You Start
3
www..com appear. Confirmation window will
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG
Using
/
, select "Delete". Press ENTER.
HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
Connections
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
4
Protect Delete MAY/01/05 am? this prog program? 12:15PM Yes Delete No es Edit 5 Dubbing Dubbing
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
Initial Setups
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
4
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
Recording / Dubbing
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
4
Protect Delete MAY/01/05 am? Are this prog youprogram? you sure? 12:15PM Yes Delete No es No Yes es 5 Edit Dubbing Dubbing
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
Playback
5
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. The selected title is now deleted.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/15 11:05AM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
Editing
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
4
5
6
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
JUN/20/05 11:30AM
Other Setups
6
Press TOP MENU to exit.
VCR functions
Note
* When a title is deleted from an Original List, corresponding title on the Playlist(s) will be also deleted. * Deleting a Playlist will not increase the recordable disc space.
Others Espanol
91
Editing Deleting Titles (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Deleting all Titles in HDD
HDD
[ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
Press HDD first.
.@/: ABC DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu HDD Menu Initial Setup DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Using / , select "HDD Menu". Press ENTER.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu Menu HDD Menu Menu Erase All in HDD
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Initial Setup Timer Program
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Easy Setting Menu
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3
With "Erase All in HDD" selected, press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Erase Erase All in HDD Original Original All Playlist Playlist All
4
Using / , select desired option. Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Delete all prog ams? programs? Yes es No
5
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure you sure? Yes es No
6
92
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. All titles in the selected list are erased.
Editing Protecting / Undo Protecting Titles
VR
Before You Start
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [ORIGINAL]
To prevent accidental editing or title erasing, you can protect the contents in the Original List. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
CLEAR
7
8
SPACE
9
PressTOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Recording / Dubbing
4
5
6
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Original List if necessary.
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Using / / / , select a desired title to protect. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
Editing
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
Other Setups
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Protect". Press ENTER. The key icon will appear at the upper left corner of the thumbnail. If the title has already been protected "Undo Protect" will be listed in the Title List Menu instead of "Protect".To cancel the protection, select "Undo Protect" and press ENTER.The key icon will disappear.
VCR functions
4
PressTOP MENU to exit. To protect the disc itself, refer to `Protecting a Disc' on page 62.
Others Espanol
93
Editing Editing Title Names
VR Video
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
[VIDEO] [VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can name titles and change the names from this menu. The names you put on the titles will be displayed on a Title List. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
1 2
CH12
XP
1 2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
CH12
XP
1 2
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
Protect 2 Delete
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Edit Title Name
MAY/01/05 12:15PM Scene Delete
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
Chapter Mar Mark 5 Add To Playlist o Playlist
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
94
Editing Editing Title Names (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
PROGRAM EDITING
Using
/
, select "Edit Title Name", then press
Editing Screen will appear. Connections
CH2 XP _
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
Space Right Left BS Clear
A F K P U Z 1 ! + ?
B G L Q V 2 " , @
C H M R W 3 # [
D I N S X 4 $ . ]
E J O T Y 5 % / ^
a f k p u z 6 & : _
b g l q v 7 ' ; {
c h m r w 8 ( < |
d i n s x 9 ) = }
e j o t y 0 * > ~
Initial Setups
Decide
Return
5 6 7
To enter a title name, refer to `Guide to Edit Title Name' below. When you finish entering the title name, press PLAY B. Or using / / / , select "Decide", then press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. Press TOP MENU to exit.
Recording / Dubbing Playback
Guide to Edit Title Name
Method 1: By selecting the letters on the screen: Using / / / , move to a desired letter or a command key, then press ENTER. The selected letter will be entered in the field at the top of the screen. Method 2: By entering the letters directly using the Number Buttons: Following the list below, press the Number Buttons repeatedly until the desired letter appears.
Press
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ABC
Editing
space , 0 .@ / : 1 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ abc def ghi jkl mno pqrs tuv wxyz 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
press
2
Other Setups
A B C a...
Note: Unidentified letters in a title name are shown by *. If you delete them, adjoining letters may change to * or other.
VCR functions
* If you want to enter the same letters successively, for example if you want to enter AA, press ENTER after you enter the first A ( 2 ), then enter the other A by pressing ( 2 ) one more time. * Press FWD g for a space. * Press SKIP H / G to move the cursor to the left or right. * Press REW h for a back space. * Press CLEAR to erase all letters entered. * You can enter up to 64 letters, for the titles in the HDD and the VR mode DVDs. * You can enter up to 30 letters, for the titles in the Video mode DVDs.
Others Espanol
95
Editing Deleting a Part of a Title
VR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
You can delete a specific part of a title. Even if a part of a title is deleted from the Playlist, the title in the Original List will remain as it was, and recordable disc space will not increase. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1 2 3
1 2
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
4
5
6
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
2
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
1 2
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
Protect 2 Delete
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Edit Title Name
MAY/01/05 12:15PM Scene Delete
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
Chapter Mar Mark 5 Add To Playlist o Playlist
6
Note
* If a certain scene is deleted from the title in the Original List, the title in the Playlist that contains the corresponding scene will be deleted also. * When you search for the start/end point, you can use SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g, VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP , PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
96
Editing Deleting a Part of a Title (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
Using
/
, select "Scene Delete", then press
8
Editing Screen will appear.
SCENE DELETING
HDD ORG
When it reaches the desired end point, press ENTER, or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then ENTER. An end point is marked, and the display shown below will appear.
SCENE DELETING
HDD ORG
Connections
0:00:00
0:25:32
Initial Setups
Start Point
Return
End Point Cancel
Return
Update
5
Press PLAY B to start playback. Play the title up to the point where you want to set a start point for the scene to be deleted.
SCENE DELETING
HDD ORG
0:12:45
* If you want to reset the end point, select "End Point Cancel" with / , then press ENTER. * If you want to quit the entire process, select "Return" with / , then press ENTER.
Recording / Dubbing
9
Start Point Return
With "Update" selected, press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
SCENE DELETING
HDD ORG
Playback
0:25:32
* If you want to quit the process, select "Return" with / .Then press ENTER.
Delete Selected Scene? Yes es No
6
When it reaches the desired start point, press ENTER, or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then ENTER. A start point is marked, and the display shown below will appear.
SCENE DELETING
HDD ORG
End Point Cancel
Return
Update
Editing
10
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear. Other Setups
SCENE DELETING SCENE DELETING
HDD HDD ORG ORG
0:20:38
0:00:00 0:25:32
Are you sure? you Delete Selected Scene? Yes es Yes es No No
VCR functions
Start Point Cancel
End Point
Return
Start End Point Cancel Point Return Return Update
* If you want to reset the start point, select "Start Point Cancel" with / , then press ENTER. * If you want to quit the entire process, select "Return" with / , then press ENTER.
11 12
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. The scene is now deleted. If you want to delete other parts, repeat steps 5-11. Otherwise, select "RETURN" and press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear. Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER to finish the editing. Press TOP MENU to exit.
Others
7
Press PLAY B to start play back again. Play the title up to the point where you want to set an end point for the scene to be deleted.
13
Espanol
97
Editing Dividing a Title
VR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
You can divide a title into two new titles.
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
Press TOP MENU Title List will appear. Example: HDD Playlist
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
1 2
1
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1 2
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
APR/01/05 12:15PM
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play Delete MAY/01/05
12:15PM
3
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Edit
4
Dubbing Dubbing 5 Search
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
1
Delete 2 Edit Title Name Scene Delete
1 2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
Divide
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Combine
4
Move Mo
5
6
Chapter Mar Mark
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
AddJUL/05/05 ylist To Pla o Playlist
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
98
Editing Dividing a Title (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com Editing Screen will appear.
PROGRAM DIVIDING
Using
/
, select "Divide", then press ENTER.
HDD PL
Connections
0:00:00
Divide
Initial Setups
5 6
Press PLAY B to start playback. Play the title up to the point where you want to divide the title. When it reaches the desired dividing point, press ENTER, or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
PROGRAM DIVIDING
HDD PL
Recording / Dubbing
0:45:10
Playback
Divide program here? prog am Yes es No
Divide
Editing
7 8
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. The title is now divided. PressTOP MENU to exit.
Other Setups VCR functions
Note
* If a disc contains the maximum number of recordings (HDD:300, DVD-RW disc:99), you cannot divide any titles. * With DVD-RW disc, you cannot divide the titles if the total number of chapters has already reached 999. * When you search for the dividing point, you can use SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g, VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP , PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
Others Espanol
99
Editing Combining Titles
VR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
You can combine two titles into a single title. Steps on how to combine title 1 and 2 are shown here as an example.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Playlist
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1 2
1
2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
4
5
6
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist if necessary.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
2
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Using / / / , select a desired title (title 1). Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Delete MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Edit
4
Dubbing Dubbing 5 Search
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit",then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
1
2 Edit Title Name
Scene Delete
Delete
1 2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
Divide
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Combine
4
Move Mo
5
6
Chapter Mar Mark
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
AddJUL/05/05 ylist To Pla o Playlist
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
100
Editing Combining Titles (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
Using
/
, select "Combine", then press
The selected title will disappear temporarily, and the frame of the next title will be highlighted.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
Connections
1 2
2
3
4
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Initial Setups
5
6
7
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
JUN/20/05 11:30AM
5
Using / / / , select a title to combine (title 2). Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
Recording / Dubbing
1 2
2
3
4
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
Combine these programs? prog ams? JUN/04/05 Yes es
10:00AM
No
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Playback
5
6
7
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
JUN/20/05 11:30AM
6 7
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Two titles will be combined into a single title. PressTOP MENU to exit.
Editing Other Setups
Note
* If the number of chapter marks in the combined title exceeds 999, the combination will be rejected. * If one of two titles in the Original List is deleted, the combined new title will be deleted. * The name of the title selected first will become the name of the combined title. * The title selected first will be the first half of the combined title.
VCR functions Others Espanol
101
Editing Moving Titles
VR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
You can move the title position. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Playlist
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
1 2
1
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Using / / / , select a desired title to move. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
1 2
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
APR/01/05 12:15PM
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play Delete MAY/01/05
12:15PM
3
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Edit
4
Dubbing Dubbing 5 Search
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
1
Delete 2 Edit Title Name Scene Delete
1 2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
Divide
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Combine
4
Move Mo
5
6
Chapter Mar Mark
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
AddJUL/05/05 ylist To Pla o Playlist
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
102
Editing Moving Titles (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com
PROGRAM EDITING
Using / , select "Move", then press ENTER. The selected title will become a single line.
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
Connections
1 2
2
3
4
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
5
6
7
Initial Setups
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
JUN/20/05 11:30AM
5
Using / / / , move the line to the desired position, then press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
DVD DVD HDD ORG HDD ORG PL PL
Recording / Dubbing
1 2
2
3
4
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
Move Mo e this prog am elsewhere? program elsewhere? JUN/04/05
Yes es
10:00AM
No
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
5
6
7
Playback
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
JUN/20/05 11:30AM
6 7
Using / , select "YES". Press ENTER. The title is now moved to the new position. Editing PressTOP MENU to exit.
Note
* When the total number of the titles exceeds 6, press FWD g to move to the first title of the next page, and press REV h to move to the last title of the previous page.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
103
Editing Chapter Marker
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Adding Chapter Marks
VR
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
You can add or delete chapter marks on each title and can use them for the Chapter Search. You can add up to 999 chapter marks anywhere you want. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR TOP MENU
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
MENU/LIST
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
Protect 2 Delete
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Edit Title Name Scene Delete
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
Chapter Mar Mark 5 Add To Playlist o Playlist
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
104
Editing Chapter Marker (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
Using
/
, select "Chapter Mark", then press
10 11
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. Chapter marks are now added. Press TOP MENU to exit.
Editing Screen will appear. Connections
CHAPTER MARKING
HDD ORG
0:00:00
Note
Add Update Cancel
* If there are chapter marks already set for the title, they are indicated on the progress bar.
* When you search for the point to add a chapter mark, you can use SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g, VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP , PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
Initial Setups
5 6
Press PLAY B to start playback. Play the title up to the point where you want to set a chapter marks. When it reaches the desired point, press ENTER, or press PAUSE F or STOP C and then ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
HDD ORG
Recording / Dubbing Playback
0:00:10
Add chapters here? Yes es No
Editing
Add
Update
Cancel
7 8 9
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. The point will be marked with a single line. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you set as many chapter marks as you want. When you finish setting all the marks you want, select "Update" using / , then press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
HDD ORG
Other Setups VCR functions
0:00:25
Update? Yes es No
Others
Add
Update
Cancel
* If you want to quit the entire process, select "Cancel" using / , then press ENTER. Espanol
105
Editing Chapter Marker (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Deleting Chapter Marks
VR
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
.@/:
ABC
DEF
If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1
7
8
SPACE
9
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
Using / / / , select a desired title to edit . Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play
3
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
Protect 2 Delete
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Edit Title Name Scene Delete
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
Chapter Mar Mark 5 Add To Playlist o Playlist
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
106
Editing Chapter Marker (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
Using
/
, select "Chapter Mark", then press
Editing Screen will appear. Connections
CHAPTER MARKING
HDD ORG
0:00:00
Initial Setups
Add
Update
Cancel
5
Press to move to the progress bar, and then select a chapter mark you want to delete using / , then press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
HDD ORG
Recording / Dubbing
0:00:00
Delete this chapter mark? mark?
Playback
Yes es
No
Add
Update
Cancel
6 7 8
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. The chapter mark disappears. Repeat steps 5 to 6 until you erase as many chapter marks you want. When you finish deleting all the unnecessary marks, press to move back to the command bar. / , select "Update". Press ENTER. Then using Confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
HDD ORG
Editing Other Setups
0:00:25
VCR functions
Update? Yes es No
Add
Update
Cancel
Others
9 10
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. The chapters marks are now deleted from the title. Press TOP MENU to exit.
Espanol
107
Editing Adding Titles to a Playlist
VR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
HDD
DVD-RW
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
.@/:
ABC
DEF
You can add a title to the Playlist as you prefer. You can add up to 99 titles for DVDs and 300 titles for HDD. If you are playing the HDD, press HDD first. If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
Press TOP MENU. Title List will appear. Example: HDD Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP CH12 XP 1 2
1
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/05 12:15PM MAY/01/05 12:15PM JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
JUN/15/05 11:05AM JUL/05/05 11:40PM JUL/18/05 10:00AM
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
2
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Using / / / , select a desired title to add to the Playlist. Press ENTER. Title List Menu will appear.
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
CH12
XP
1 2
1
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
APR/01/05 12:15PM
2 Play From Start Play From Star
Resume Pla Play Protect MAY/01/05
12:15PM JUN/04/05 10:00AM
3
Delete
4
Edit Dubbing Dubbing
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
Search JUL/05/05
11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
3
Using / , select "Edit", then press ENTER. Edit Menu will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
Protect 2 Delete
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Edit Title Name Scene Delete
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
Chapter Mar Mark 5 Add To Playlist o Playlist
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
108
Editing Adding Titles to a Playlist (Cont'd)
Before You Start
4
www..com ENTER.
Using
/
, select "Add To Playlist", then press
Confirmation window will appear.
PROGRAM EDITING
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
Connections
CH12
XP
1 2
1
Protect 2 Delete
3
APR/01/05 12:15PM
Edit Title program? Make playlist prog Make playlist Nameam? MAY/01/05
12:15PM Scene Delete No Yes es
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
Chapter Mar Mark 5 Add To Playlist o Playlist
6
Initial Setups
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
5 6
Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. The selected title is now added to the Playlist, and the Playlist will be displayed automatically. Press TOP MENU to exit.
Recording / Dubbing
Note
* For VR mode DVD-RW disc, if the Playlist contains more than 99 titles or 999 chapters, "Add To Playlist" cannot be selected. * For the HDD, if the Playlist contains more than 300 titles, "Add to Playlist" cannot be selected. * To delete titles from Playlist, refer to `Deleting Titles' on pages 90-91. Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
109
Other Setups Tour of the Setup Menus
The following table shows the items which you can change the setting and their default settings. Refer to the following table for your convenience.
Setup www..com Menu Items OSD Language Page 21 Selection (highlight is the default) English Francais Espanol Page 25 Off Auto Manual On Off Pages 22-23 Page 23 Stereo SAP 4 : 3 Letter Box 4 : 3 Pan & Scan 16 : 9 Wide All level 8 to 1 English French Spanish Other Original English French Spanish Other Off English French Spanish Other PCM 48kHz 96kHz Dolby Digital PCM Stream Dynamic Range Control On Off Fast Forward with Audio On Off Variable Skip 5 seconds 15seconds 30seconds 1 minute 5 minutes Variable Replay 5 seconds 15seconds 30seconds 1 minute 5 minutes On Off On Off Contents Set the language for OSD (on-screen display).
Clock Setting
Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting Pages 24-25 Daylight Saving Time Page 26 Auto Preset Manual Preset TV Audio Select Page 27 TV Aspect Pages 28 Parental Lock Page 113 Disc Menu Language Page 114
Channel Setting
Playback
Set the parental level for DVD Disc Playback. Set the language for Disc Menu.
Audio Language Page 114
Set the language for audio.
Subtitle Language Page 114
Set the language for subtitles.
Audio Out Page 115
Set whether the sound recorded in 96 kHz will be down sampled in 48 kHz. Set the type of sound signal output from the digital audio output jack. Compressing the range of sound volume.
Set whether or not to output sound during fast forward playback. Set the amount of skip time when you press VARIABLE SKIP .
Variable Replay/Skip Speed Page 116
Set the amount of rewind time when you press VARIABLE REPLAY .
Angle Icon Page 117 Progressive Page 117
Set whether or not to display the angle icon. Set progressive scan on/off.
110
Other Setups Tour of the Setup Menus (Cont'd)
Setup www..com Menu Items Record Auto Finalize Pages 64-65 Selection (highlight is the default) Disc Full On Off End of Timer Rec On Off End of Dubbing On Off Off 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes L1 (Rear) Video In S-Video In L2 (Front) Video In S-Video In Auto Bright Dark On Off Contents
Before You Start Connections Initial Setups
Auto Chapter Page 37
Display
Select Video Page 60
Set the video input type for the external input.
Recording / Dubbing
FL Dimmer Page 119 Screen Saver Page 119 Reset to factory default Page 120
Set the brightness of the Front Panel Display.
Playback
Set the idling time before the screen saver starts.
Note
* If you change the settings in the Setup Menus, the information of the contents remain memorized even after the power is turned off or the disc tray is opened or closed.
Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
111
Other Setups Playback Setting
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. If "Advanced Menu" is displayed, proceed to step 3.
Easy Setting Menu DVD Menu enu HDD MENU HDD Menu enu DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Initial Setup Initial Setup
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
Advanced Menu
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
2 3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using / , select "Advanced Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
HDD Menu Initial Setup
REV
PLAY
FWD
Record Display
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
4
Using / , select "Playback". Press ENTER. Playback Menu will appear.
Playback Pla TV Aspect Parental Loc arental Lock Disc Menu Language Menu Audio Language udio Subtitle Language Audio Out udio Variable Replay/Skip Speed le Replay/Skip Angle Icon Progressive Prog
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
5 6 7
Using / , select a desired item to set. Press ENTER. Menu or option window will appear. Referring to 1 to 8 on pages 113-117, set the selected item. When you finish with the setting, press SETUP to exit.
112
Other Setups Playback Setting (Cont'd) 1. Parental Lock
www..com
Before You Start
(Default: All)
You can set the Parental Lock Level to keep your children from viewing the inappropriate materials. (Follow the steps 1 to 4 on page 112.) Using / , select "Parental Lock". Press ENTER. Option window will appear. * If you haven't set a password, proceed to A. * If you have already set a password, proceed to B. A:When a password has not been set yet. Parental Level List will appear.
Parental Lock All 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
B:When a password has been set already. Password input field will appear.
Password ord ____
Connections Initial Setups
1 Using the Number Buttons, enter the 4-digit password (The password will be displayed as "*"for your security.) Press ENTER. Parental Level List will appear.
Parental Loc arental Lock All 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Recording / Dubbing
1 Using / , select a desired level, then press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Change P Password? Yes No
2 Using / , select a desired level, then press ENTER. "Change Password?" will appear.
Change Password? Pass Yes No
Playback
2 Using / , select "Yes", then press ENTER. Password input field will appear.
Password ____
3 Using the Number Buttons, enter the 4-digit password. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
* If you want to change the password, select "Yes" and press ENTER. The password input field will appear. Input the new password, then press ENTER. The setting is now activated. * If you only want to change the setting and not want to change the password, select "No", then press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Editing Other Setups
Note
* Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. Playback will stop if the disc's general rating exceeds the level you set. It will require you to enter a password before the disc will be played back. This function prevents your children from viewing inappropriate materials. * Parental Lock may not be available on some discs. * Some DVDs may not completely support Parental Lock. Be sure to check if the Parental Lock operates in the way that you have set. * Record the password in case you forget it. * If you enter incorrect number, use to move back to the number you want to correct and re-enter the correct number. * When you forget the password or you want to clear all settings in Parental Lock, enter 4, 7, 3, 7 using the Number Buttons in input window at step B. Password will be cleared and Parental Lock Levels will be set to "All".
VCR functions
RATING EXPLANATION
* ALL-Parental Controls is inactive; all discs can play. * 8 - Adult material * 7 - NC - 17 - Not appropriate for children under 17 * 6 - R - Restricted; parental approval required for viewers under 18 * 4 - PG13 - Unsuitable for children under 13 * 3 - PG - Parental Guidance suggested * 1 - G - General Audience; recommended for all ages
Others Espanol
113
Other Setups Playback Setting (Cont'd) 2. Disc Menu Language (Default: English)
You can set the language for Disc Menu. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.) Using / , select "Disc Menu Language". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Disc Men Language Menu English French Spanish Other
www..com
4. Subtitle Language (Default: Off)
You can set the subtitle language. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.) Using / , select "Subtitle Language". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Subtitle Language Off English French Spanish Other
* Using / , select a desired language. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
* Using / , select a desired language. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. If "Other" is selected, enter 4-digit code using the Number buttons.
Code ____
3. Audio Language (Default: Original)
You can set the Audio Language. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.) Using / , select "Audio Language". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Audio Language Original Or English French Spanish Other
When you finish entering the code, press ENTER. Refer to `Language Code' on page 135.
* Using / , select a desired language. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. * When "Original" is selected, the audio language will be the disc's default language.
114
Other Setups Playback Setting (Cont'd) 5. Audio Out
Dolby Digital (Default: Stream)
Dolby Dolby Digital PCM DTSStream
Before You Start
www..com
You can set the digital audio output. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.) Using / , select "Audio Out". Press ENTER. Menu window will appear.
Audio Out PCM Dolby Digital Dynamic Range Control Fast Forward with Audio
Connections
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. PCM: Convert the Dolby Digital into "PCM" (2 channel). When your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible with Dolby Digital, set to PCM.
Initial Setups
* Using / , select a desired item to set. Press ENTER. Menu or Option window will appear. Referring to the explanations below, set the selected item. PCM (Default: 48kHz)
Dolby Digital PCM 48kHz 96kHz
Stream: Outputs Dolby Digital signals. When your amplifier / decoder is compatible with Dolby Digital, set to "Stream".
Recording / Dubbing
Note
When playing back a DVD-RW disc recorded in VR mode
* If the audio on a disc is recorded in Dolby Digital format, set Dolby Digital to PCM so that you can switch to main audio (L), sub audio (R), or a mix of both (L / R) with your amplifier / decoder.
Playback
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. 48kHz : If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible with 96kHz PCM, select "48kHz". 96kHz sound will be output in 48kHz. 96kHz : If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with 96kHz PCM, select "96kHz". 96kHz sound will be output.
Editing Other Setups
Note
When playing back disc with copyright protection * Even if you select "96kHz", the sound will be down sampled at 48kHz.
VCR functions Others Espanol
115
Other Setups Playback Setting (Cont'd)
Dynamic Range Control (Default: On) You can set to "On" to compress the range between www..com soft and loud sounds.
Dynamic Range Control On DTS Off
6. Variable Replay / Skip Speed
Assign the VARIABLE REPLAY / VARIABLE SKIP button an amount of time to rewind or skip. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112. See page 76 also.) Using / , select "Variable Replay / Skip Speed ". Press ENTER. Menu window will appear.
Variable Replay/Skip Speed le Replay/Skip
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated. Fast Forward with Audio (Default: On) You can set to "On" to output the sound during playback in x1.5 fast forward.
Fast Forward with A ard Dolby DigitalAudio On DTS Off
Variable Skip le Variable Repla le Replay
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
* Using / , select a desired item to set. Press ENTER. Option window will appear. Referring to the explanations below, set the selected item. Variable Skip (Default: 30 seconds) Sets the amount of skip time for VARIABLE SKIP .
Var le Skip ariable 5 seconds 15 seconds 30 seconds Display 1 min Displa minute 5 min minutes
Variable Replay (Default: 30 seconds) Sets the amount of rewind time for VARIABLE REPLAY .
Variable Repla le Replay 5 seconds 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 min minute 5 min minutes
116
Other Setups Playback Setting (Cont'd) 7. Angle Icon (Default: Off)
You can set to "On" to show the Angle icon on the screen whenever the feature is available. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112. See page 88 also.) Using / , select "Angle Icon". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Angle Icon On Off
Before You Start
www..com
Connections Initial Setups
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Recording / Dubbing
8. Progressive (Default: Off)
You can set to "On" to activate progressive scan. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.) Using / , select "Progressive". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Progressive Prog On Off
Playback
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
117
Other Setups Display Setting
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
1
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. If "Advanced Menu" is displayed, proceed to step 3.
Easy Setting Menu DVD Menu enu HDD MENU HDD Menu enu DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
Initial Setup Initial Setup
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
Advanced Menu
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
2 3
Using / , select "Advanced Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
DVD Menu HDD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Advanced Menu
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Initial Setup
REV
PLAY
FWD
Easy Setting Menu
Display Reset to factory default
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
4
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Using / , select "Display". Press ENTER. Display Menu will appear.
Display Displa Select Video FL Dimmer Screen Sa Saver
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
5 6 7
Using / , select a desired item to set. Press ENTER. Menu or option window will appear. Referring to 1 and 2 on page 119, set the selected item. When you finish with the setting, press SETUP to exit.
118
Other Setups Display Setting (Cont'd) 1. FL Dimmer (Default:Auto)
You can set the brightness of the Front Panel Display. You can select a setting from "Auto", "Bright", or "Dark".When "Auto" is selected, the display turns brighter when the power is on and darker when the power is off. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 118.) Using / , select "FL Dimmer". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
FL Dimmer Auto Bright Br Dark Dar
Before You Start
www..com
Connections Initial Setups
* Using / select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Recording / Dubbing
2. Screen Saver (Default: On)
You can set to "On" to activate the Screen Saver after 10 minutes of no activity. (Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 118.) Using / , select "Screen Saver". Press ENTER. Option window will appear.
Screen Sa Saver On Off
Playback Editing
* Using / , select a desired setting. Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
119
Other Setups Reset to Factory Default
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Resets the settings to the factory default (refer to the `Note' on this page for the exceptions).
1
.@/:
ABC
DEF
Press SETUP. "Easy Setting Menu" or "Advanced Menu" will appear. If "Advanced Menu" is displayed, proceed to step 3.
Easy Setting Menu DVD Menu enu HDD MENU HDD Menu enu DVD Disc Format VD Format DVD Recording Format VD Format Finalize Finaliz Disc Protect Timer Program Delete Playlist Playlist
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
Initial Setup Initial Setup
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Advanced Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
2
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Using / , select "Advanced Menu". Press ENTER. Using / , select "Initial Setup". Press ENTER.
Advanced Menu DVD Menu OSD Language Clock Setting Channel Setting Playback Timer Program Record Display
3
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
HDD Menu Initial Setup
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Using / , select "Reset to factory default". Press ENTER. Confirmation window will appear.
Reset to factory default OK? factory efault Yes No
5
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure? you Yes No
6
Note
* The settings listed below will remain unchanged even after resetting to the factory default. - OSD Language Setting - Clock Setting - Parental Lock Setting - Progressive Scan Setting - HDD/DVD Timer Programs - HDD Original List / Playlist
Using / , select "Yes". Press ENTER. All setting are now reset to the factory default. Press SETUP to exit.
7
120
VCR functions Guide to Display Information (VCR)
VCR www..com Press VCR first. Press DISPLAY to show the information on the display. 1 2 Playback status Current channel number and an audio status of the program.This information appears only in the stop mode. Rec Mode Tape Counter Audio status of the current videotape
Before You Start Connections
1
CH 21 STEREO
2
3 4 5
Initial Setups
SP
0:00:00
HIFI
Recording / Dubbing
3
4
5
Note
* This is an example screen only for explanation. Displayed items will change depending on the actual mode.
Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
121
VCR functions Recording
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Basic Recording
VCR
Before recording, make sure:
.@/: ABC DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
* The desired channel is selected by pressing the Number Buttons or CHANNEL / . * There is a videotape with a record tab in the unit. * The desired Rec Mode (SP: Standard Play or SLP: Super Long Play) is selected by pressing REC MODE on the remote control.
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
Rec Mode
Tape speed Type of tape SP mode SLP mode Recording / Playback Time T60 T120 T160 T210 1 hour 2 hours 2-2 / 3 hours 3-1 / 2 hours 3 hours 6 hours 8 hours 10-1 / 2 hours
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
* Stereo or SAP is selected. (See page 27.)
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Press VCR first.
1
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin the recording. To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press PAUSE F. After the unit has been in pause for five minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the videotape and the video head from damage. Press STOP C when the recording is completed.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
2
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
* Although you can playback a videotape recorded in the SP, LP, or SLP mode on this unit, LP mode recording is not available. * Timer Recording is not available with VCR. * If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set for HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will automatically switch to the programmed channel 15 seconds before the programmed time and the recording in progress on the VCR will be cancelled UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording for HDD or DVD will start without cancelling the recording currently in progress on the VCR. In this case, the recording of the same channel will be made on both VCR and the HDD or DVD.
To view one channel while recording another: Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a recorded videotape, remove its record tab. To record on it later, cover the hole with cellophane tape. 1 If you want to watch the TV programs, simply select the channel you want to watch with the TV's remote. 2 If you want to watch the cable TV or the satellite TV programs, select the channel you want to watch at the cable box or the satellite box.
Record tab
122
VCR functions Recording (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
One Touch Recording
VCR
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
This function allows you to set the recording length simply by pressing REC / OTR (VCR).
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Press VCR first.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
During normal recording, press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin One Touch Recording. You can select a fixed recording time by pressing REC / OTR (VCR) repeatedly.
(Normal recording) (0:30) (7:30) (1:00)
Initial Setups
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
(8:00)
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
When One Touch Recording is finished, the unit will turn off automatically. To change the recording length during the One Touch Recording, press REC / OTR (VCR) repeatedly until the desired length appear. To cancel the One Touch Recording within the specified time, press STOP C.
Playback
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
* The remaining recording time will appear on the display panel during a One Touch Recording. Press DISPLAY to see it on the TV screen. * You cannot pause a One Touch Recording. * If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in progress on the VCR and the Timer Recording set for HDD or DVD is about to begin, the unit will automatically switch to the programmed channel 15 seconds before the programmed time and the recording in progress on the VCR will be cancelled UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording for HDD or DVD will start without cancelling the recording currently in progress on the VCR. In this case, the recording of the same channel will be made on both VCR and the HDD or DVD.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
123
VCR functions Playback
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
VCR
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input Channel. (See page 18.)
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Press POWER on the remote control or the front panel of the unit. Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input Channel.
7
8
SPACE
9
Press VCR first.
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Insert a prerecorded videotape. Press PLAY B to begin playback. * If there is no record tab, playback starts automatically. During playback, press PAUSE F. Playback will pause and sound will be muted. Press PLAY B to resume playback. Press STOP C to stop playback. Press STOP / EJECT C A on the front panel of the unit to eject the videotape.
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
3 4 5 6
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Note
* Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon playback.To adjust the tracking manually, press CHANNEL / .
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
OPEN / CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT
REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
HDD
DVD
STOP
PLAY
HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
POWER
STOP / EJECT C A
124
VCR functions Search
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Index Search
VCR
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of each recording you make. You may skip to a specific marked point by following the steps below.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Press VCR first.
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
Press SEARCH MODE so that the Index Input Screen will appear. Using the Number Buttons, enter the number of recordings you wish to skip within 30 seconds.
INDEX SEARCH 03
Initial Setups
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
* To exit the Index Input Screen, press STOP C. Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
3
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press FWD g / REV h to start the Index Search. If you want to go in the forward direction, press FWD g. If you want to go in the reverse direction, press REV h. After index search, the VCR will play the videotape automatically.
CURRENT PROGRAM Beginning of tape End of tape
Editing Other Setups
Pro.1 02
Pro.2 01
Pro.3 01
Pro.4 02
Pro.5 03
INDEX MARK
Note
* Every time a videotape is recorded, an index mark is written on the videotape. * Index Search and Time Search are not available during recording.
VCR functions Others Espanol
125
VCR functions Search (Cont'd)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Time Search
VCR
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
This function allows you to go to a specific point on a videotape by entering the exact amount of time you wish to skip in order to reach the point.
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Press VCR first.
7
8
SPACE
9
1
CLEAR
Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly so that the Time Input Screen will appear. Using the Number Buttons, enter your desired time to skip with in 30 seconds.
TIME SEARCH 2:50
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
* To exit the Index Input Screen, press STOP C.
REV
PLAY
FWD
3
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Press FWD g or REV h to start Time Search. If you want to go in the forward direction, press FWD g. If you want to go in the reverse direction, press REV h. After Time Search, the unit will play the videotape automatically.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
* Index Search and Time Search are not available during recording. * Press STOP C to stop the search. * If the end of the videotape is reached during a search, this unit will cancel the search and rewind the videotape.
126
VCR functions Other Operations
VCR
Before You Start
www..com
Note
* Still / slow / pause mode will be automatically cancelled after 5 minutes to prevent damage to the videotape and the video head. * To return to playback from the Picture Search / Still / Slow mode, press PLAY B.
Press VCR first. Fast forward:
When the unit is in stop mode, press FWD g to fast forward the videotape.
Connections
Rewind:
When the unit is in stop mode, press REV h to rewind the videotape.
Your Selection Type of recorded tape L-channel Monaural L Main audio program HIFI R-channel Monaural R Main audio program Monaural L+R Main audio program MONO
Initial Setups
To cue or review picture during playback (Picture Search):
Press FWD g or REV h during playback. Press it again and the unit will search in super high speed. (in the SLP mode only)
non Hi-Fi tapes Hi-Fi tapes recorded in Hi-Fi stereo Hi-Fi tapes recorded main audio program Hi-Fi tapes recorded second audio program
To freeze the picture on the TV screen during playback (Still mode):
Press PAUSE F. Each time you press the button, the picture will be forwarded by one frame. If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still mode, stabilize the picture by pressing CHANNEL / . If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the vertical hold control on your TV, if equipped.
Recording / Dubbing
Second audio Second audio Second audio program program program
Playback
Counter Reset:
Press CLEAR.
To playback in slow motion:
Press SLOW during playback or the still mode. If the noise bars appear on the TV screen, you can reduce it by pressing CHANNEL / . Editing
Automatic rewind
When a videotape is played or fast forwarded to its end, the videotape will rewind to the beginning, stop and eject itself.
Setting the Playback audio:
Press AUDIO on the remote control to select "Hi-Fi" or "MONO" as your playback audio. * If the unit is connected to a stereo TV, select "HIFI". * If the unit is connected to a monaural TV, select "MONO". * If the videotape is recorded in monaural, the audio mode is fixed to the monaural and cannot be changed.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
127
Others Troubleshooting
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing. Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper performance.
General Operation
Error message Cause & Solution * The operation is not available. Error Now Recording. Error Now Dubbing. Error Timer program starts soon.
www..com
* The operation is not available during recording.
* The operation is not available during dubbing.
* The operation is not available since a Timer Recording will start soon.
Discs
Error message Disc Error Region Error Please eject the disc. Playback is not authorized in your region. Error Please insert a valid disc. Error Cannot format. Cause & Solution * Invalid disc is inserted. Please insert a disc supported by this unit. (See pages 29 and 66.) * A disc with the invalid region code is inserted. This unit only supports the discs with region code 1 or ALL.
* No disc or an invalid disc is inserted. Please insert a disc supported by this unit. (See pages 29 and 66.) * The discs not supported by this unit cannot be formatted. Please use the discs supported by this unit. (See page 29.) * During HDD playback or recording, formatting will not be executed. Stop the playback or recording. * The discs not supported by this unit cannot be finalized. Please use the discs supported by this unit. (See page 29.) * The finalization of the Video mode DVD discs made on other unit cannot be undone. * Disc Protect is only available with the VR mode DVD-RW discs. Other discs cannot be protedcted. (See page 62.)
Error Cannot finalize. Error Un-finalize cannot be performed. Error Disc protect cannot be performed.
Timer Recording / Recording & Navigator
Error message Error Prohibited timer program. Cause & Solution * The entry for the Timer Recording is invalid. The recording duration must be in 24 hour period. The end time must be later than the present time, and the start time must be before 1-1-2055. Re-program the Timer Recording correctly. (See pages 42-43.) * The maximum number of timer programs is exceeded. Delete unnecessary timer programs. (See pages 42-43.)
Error Cannot register timer program.
128
Others Troubleshooting (Cont'd) Playback / Editing
Error message
www..com
Before You Start
Cause & Solution Connections * The current Parental Lock setting prohibits the playback. Change the Parental Level. (See page 113.)
Parental Lock On The current selected parental level prohibits playback. Error Program Edit Error. The number of titles is maximum. Error The number of chapters is maximum. Error Program Edit Error. The number of programs in playlist is maximum.
* The maximum number of titles is exceeded. Delete unnecessary titles. (See pages 90-91.) * The maximum number of chapters is exceeded. Delete unnecessary chapter marks. (See pages 106-107.)
Initial Setups
* The maximum number of titles in the Playlist is exceeded. Delete unnecessary titles in the Playlist. (See pages 92, 98-99.)
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing
Error message Error Cannot dubbing now. Cause & Solution * No recording media is inside the unit. Insert the recordable media. * Recordable space is not enough. Make sure the recording media has enough space. * The device is in use for playback or recording. Stop the playback or recording. * The dubbing material is copy protected.You cannot dub the copy protected material. * You are trying to dub to the finalized Video mode DVD.You cannot dub to the finalized Video mode DVDs. * The dubbing you are trying to make does not finish by 3 minutes before the Timer Recording. Re-arrange the timer programs, or try dubbing when there is no Timer Recording in standby. * You are trying to add more than 32 titles to the Dubbing List. Or the number of the titles or the chapters of the recording media exceeds the max. Delete unnecessary titles or the chapters from the list. * The recording function encountered a copy control signal. * You cannot dub copy protected programs.
Playback Editing
Error Timer programmed. No dubbing now. Error Cannot select program. Error Copy guard detected. Dubbing is stopped. Error HDD remaining space error Dubbing cannot be performed. Error DVD remaining space error Dubbing cannot be performed.
Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
* There is not enough space left on the HDD to finish the dubbing. Delete the unnecessary titles in the Original List, or change the Rec Mode.
* There is not enough space left on the DVD to finish the dubbing. Insert a recordable DVD, delete the unnecessary titles in the Original List, or change the Rec Mode.
129
Others Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
www..com
Symptom The power does not turn on.
Solution * Check that the AC power cord is connected securely. * Batteries of the remote control are weak. * If above solutions do not work, press RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object to re-start the unit. (See page 10.) * During Auto Clock Setting, the POWER Light lights up. * The unit turns on automatically 3 minutes before the Timer Recording. * Finish up the Language Setting procedure by selecting a language in the OSD Language Setting Menu. Press ENTER to activate the setting. * The power turns off automatically when abnormality is detected on the disc. Press POWER or OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray, and before it is opened completely, press the button again. Then take out the disc. * The power turns off automatically when an OTR is completed. * There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object to re-start the unit. (See page 10.) Solution * or error message appears if the operation is prohibited. * Batteries of the remote control are weak or exhausted * There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object to re-start the unit. (See page 10.) * Check if the connections are made securely and correctly. * Check if the cables are not damaged. * Check if a correct external input channel is selected on your TV. (See page 18.) * Check if you have comleted the Channel Setting. * If a Timer Recording is in standby or if a recording is in progress, these operations cannot be performed. Delete timer programs or stop the recording. * Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and leave the unit turned on for about two hours until the moisture evaporates. (See page 4.) * There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object to re-start the unit. (See page 10.)
The unit turns on automatically without any operation. P O W E R The OSD Language Setting Menu appears every time the power turns on. The power turns off automatically .
Symptom The unit does not function.
G E N E R A L
No picture, sound or menu appears on the screen.
Clock Setting and Channel Setting cannot be performed. The unit does not operate properly.
The abnormal display appears in the Front Panel Display.
130
Others Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
www..com
Before You Start
C H A N N E L
Symptom TV channels cannot be changed.
Solution * Check if the connections are made securely and correctly. * Check if the cables are not damaged. * Try Channel Setting by following the steps on pages 22-23. * The channels may be set to be skipped. * This unit does not skip the external input channels. This is not a malfunction.
Connections
Only specific channels do not appear. The external input channels (such as L1 or L2) cannot be skipped.
Initial Setups
Symptom Recording is impossible.
Solution * This unit cannot record a program that contains copy protection signal. This is not a malfunction. * The space of the recording media may be used up. Try deleting unnecessary titles from the Original List, or exchange it with the recordable media. * The maximum number of titles or chapters has exceeded. Delete the unnecessary titles to make enough space or insert a new recordable media. * Check if the connections are made securely and correctly. * Copy-once programs can only be recorded on a CPRM compatible VR mode DVD-RW. * Check if the disc is not protected or finalized. Undo the protection or the finalization. * DVD-RW once formatted with other DVD recorders cannot be recorded on this unit. This is not malfunction. * Video mode DVDs recorded by other DVD recorders cannot be used on this unit unless finalized. * Check if the connections are made securely and correctly. * Try pressing INPUT SELECT repeatedly. * Turn on the all connected devices. * Check if the connections are made securely and correctly. * The internal clock of the unit may have been stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 30 seconds. Reset the clock. (See pages 24-26.) * Check if a videotape is inserted. * Check if a videotape has a record tab intact.
Recording / Dubbing
R E C O R D I N G
Playback
Recording on the DVD disc is impossible.
Editing
The image from the external device cannot be displayed or recorded. Timer Recording cannot be performed.
Other Setups
Recording to a videotape is impossible.
VCR functions Others Espanol
131
Others Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
www..com
Symptom
Solution * Check if the recordable disc is inserted. * Check if the disc is loaded correctly with the labeled side facing up. * Discs made on other devices or on personal computers cannot be played back on this unit unless it is finalized on the device. Even if it is finalized, the performance of those discs are not guranteed on this unit. * The disc may be dirty or flawed. Clean the disc. * Check if all the connections are made correctly. * Check if the setting for the Progressive Scan is correct. (See page 117.) * Check the Parental Lock Setting. (See page 113.) * Resume function may be activated. See page 72 to cancel the resume point. * Check the TV Aspect Ratio. (See page28) * A different aspect ratio will be used when the aspect ratio specified by the disc is not supported by this unit. * During fast forward or fast reverse, playback picture may be distored. This is not a malfunction. * Connect to TV directly. When you connect this unit with the television via VCR or other devices, the pictue may be distorted due to the copy-protection signal. * Check if the cables are damaged. * Keep the equipment which may cause electrical disturbances, such as a cellular phone, away. * Turn on all connected devices. * Check if the external input channel is set correctly. * Check if the connections are made securely and correctly. * Check if the Audio Out Setting is set correctly. (See page 115) * There is a possibility that the selected subtitle language is not supported by the disc. * If the audio source is in the Dolby Digital format, set the Dolby Digital Setting to "PCM" in the Setup Menu. (See page 115) * Multilingual subtitles are not supported by the disc. * Some audio languages or the subtitle languages can be changed only from the Disc Menu. Please refer to the disc's manual. * Even though the multi-angle feature is supported by the disc, that does not mean all the scenes are shot from multi-angles. Changing angles are available only for those scenes shot from the multi-angle. * Adjust the tracking by pressing CHANNEL o / p while you are playing a videotape. * VCR Head cleaning may be necessary. Refer to 'AUTO HEAD CLEANING' on page 136.
Disc Playback cannot be performed.
Playback does not start from the beginning. TV aspect ratio does not match for your TV screen.
Playback picture is distorted. Color of the picture is abnormal.
P L A Y B A C K
There is no sound, or no subtitle.
Audio Out Setting can not be changed. Audio Language or the Subtitle Language of the DVD can not be changed. Camera angles can not be changed.
VCR picture is noisy. During VCR playback, pictures do not come out even though sound does.
* If you are still having trouble with this unit after checking `Troubleshooting', write down the error code and the error description, and call our helpline mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized Service Center.
132
Others Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
www..com
Before You Start
Symptom
Solution * The titles or the disc itself may be protected. Cancel the protection by following the steps on page 93 for title protection, and page 62 for disc protection. * The titles in the Video mode discs cannot be edited or deleted if they are finalized. Undo the finalization by following the steps on page 63. * With Video mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will increase only when the last title in the Original List is deleted. With DVD-R discs, deleting a title will not increase the disc space. * Deleting a title in the Playlist will not increase the capacity, try deleting a title in the Original List. * Some DVD players do not play back the disc made on other recorder. Refer to the manual of the palyer. * Video mode discs made on other recorder cannot be dubbed using this unit. * When the number of the titles or the chapters exceeds the maximum recordable number, the dubbing will not be executed. * Copy-once programs or the copy protected programs may not be dubbed depending on the recording media. Regarding the limitations on dubbing, refer to the page 47.
Titles can not be edited or deleted.
Connections
E D I T I N G
The capacity of the disc doesn't increase even if the recorded program is deleted.
Initial Setups
The disc cannot be played back on other player even though it is finalized properly. Dubbing cannot be executed.
Recording / Dubbing Playback
Symptom R E M O T E C O N T R O L The remote control does not function.
Solution * No batteries in the remote or the batteries may be weak. Replace the batteries. * Make sure there is no obstacle between the remote and the unit. * Try getting closer to the unit. (See page 15.) * Make sure to press the Device Select Button before operating on the device of your choice. * If above solutions do not solve the problem, please call our helpline mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized Sercive Center for help. * While the Programmed Recordings Screen, the Dubbing Menu Screen, or the Title List is displayed or while the disc is loading, the SETUP button does not respond.
Editing Other Setups
Pressing SETUP does not do anything.
VCR functions
Symptom O T H E R S The Clock display does not appear in the Front Panel Display. When you forget the password for Parental Lock.
Solution * Check that the AC power cord is connected securely. * (In case of power failure) Check the breaker and Clock Setting. * Please cancel the password and the set level. (See page 113.)
Others Espanol
133
Others Glossary
Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents www..com sound. In contrast, digital audio which can be an electrical signal,but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio. Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See also Title. Component video output This is a video signal format that conveys each of three principal colors of light (red, blue and green) through different signal lines. This allows the viewers to experience picture colors as original as it is. There are several signal formats, including Y / PB / PR and Y / CB / CR. CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) This is a format used to record copy-once programs. By recording coded data on the area of DVD discs that ordinary writing software cannot write on, it prevents copy-once programs from being recorded repeatedly on different media. Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44, 100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio. Dolby Digital The system developed by Dolby Laboratories to compress digital sound. It offers you sound of stereo (2ch) or multi-channel audio. Finalize To make recorded contents on DVD discs possible to be played back on DVD players. With this unit, it is possible to finalize DVD-RW/R discs. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) MP3 is a method of compressing files. You can copy MP3 files on CD-RW / R discs from the computer and play back the files on this unit. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a format that converts audio into digital data. It is mainly used for Audio CDs and DAT. This unit can play back sounds as realistic as possible by converting even compressed Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to PCM. Playlist From this list you can play back contents of a disc in your desired order or sequence. Also it allows to search a specific scene directly. Progressive scan (480p) A type of display that does not split each frame into fields, and instead scans directly through all the scanlines of each frame in order. Progressive scan provides less flickering and higher image resolution than traditional (480i) TV signals. See page 17 for instructions on selective progressive scan mode. Regions code Regions associate discs and players with particular areas of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking at the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Sampling frequency The rate which sound is measured by a specified interval to turn it into digital audio data. The numbers of sampling in one second defines as sampling frequency. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality is. SAP (Secondary Audio Program) Sub-audio channel which is delivered separately from main-audio channel. This audio channel is used as an alternate in bilingual broadcasting. S-Video output It delivers independently each signal of color(C) and luminance(Y) to TV as video signals, so that higher-quality picture will be materialised. Title (DVD only) A collection of chapters on DVD disc. See also chapter. Track Audio CDs use tracks to divide the content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also Chapter. WMA WMA is the audio file compressing technology developed by Microsoft. You can copy WMA files on CD-RW / R discs from a computer and play them back on this unit.
134
Others Language Code
Language Code www..com Abkhazian 4748 Afar 4747 Afrikaans 4752 Albanian 6563 Amharic 4759 Arabic 4764 Armenian 5471 Assamese 4765 Aymara 4771 Azerbaijani 4772 Bashkir 4847 Basque 5167 Bengali;Bangla 4860 Bhutani 5072 Bihari 4854 Bislama 4855 Breton 4864 Bulgarian 4853 Burmese 5971 Byelorussian 4851 Cambodian 5759 Catalan 4947 Chinese 7254 Corsican 4961 Croatian 5464 Czech 4965 Danish 5047 Dutch 6058 English 5160 Esperanto 5161 Estonian 5166 Faroese 5261 Fiji 5256 Finnish 5255 Language French Frisian Galician Georgian German Greek Greenlandic Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Irish Italian Japanese Javanese Kannada Kashmiri Kazakh Kinyarwanda Kirghiz Kirundi Korean Kurdish Laothian Latin Latvian; Lettish Lingala Code 5264 5271 5358 5747 5051 5158 5758 5360 5367 5447 5569 5455 5467 5565 5560 5547 5551 5557 5347 5566 5647 5669 5760 5765 5757 6469 5771 6460 5761 5767 5861 5847 5868 5860 Language Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Malay Malayalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Nauru Nepali Norwegian Occitan Oromo (Afan) Oriya Panjabi Pashto; Pushto Persian Polish Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sangho Sanskrit Scots Gaelic Serbian Serbo-Croatian Sesotho Setswana Shona Code 5866 5957 5953 5965 5958 5966 5955 5964 5961 5960 6047 6051 6061 6149 6159 6164 6247 6265 5247 6258 6266 6367 6459 6461 6467 6559 6553 6547 5350 6564 6554 6566 6660 6560 Language Sindhi Singhalese Siswat Slovak Slovenian Somali Spanish Sundanese Swahili Swedish Tagalog Tajik Tamil Tatar Telugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya Tonga Tsonga Turkish Turkmen Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Welsh Wolof Xhosa Yiddish Yoruba Zulu Code 6550 6555 6565 6557 6558 6561 5165 6567 6569 6568 6658 6653 6647 6666 6651 6654 4861 6655 6661 6665 6664 6657 6669 6757 6764 6772 6855 6861 4971 6961 7054 5655 7161 7267 Before You Start Connections Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing Playback Editing Other Setups VCR functions Others Espanol
135
Others Maintenance
SERVICING
www..com * Please refer to relevant topics on the `Troubleshooting' on pages 128-133 before returning the product. * If this unit becomes inoperative, do not try to correct the problem by yourself. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. Turn off, unplug the power plug and please call our help line mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized Service Center.
CLEANING THE CABINET
* Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing alcohol, spirits, ammonia or abrasive.
HDD HDD HANDLING
* HDD is a precision apparatus that is susceptible to vibration, strong impact or dirt. Depending on the installation environment or handling, the unit may become partially damaged or in the worst case, recording or replaying may not be available. Especially while the HDD is in motion, do not subject it to vibration or strong impact or pull out the power plug. And if a power failure occurs the content of the recording/replaying program may be lost.
HDD MOVING THE UNIT
* HDD rotates at high speed when in operation. Be sure that rotation has stopped and then move the unit without subjecting it to strong impact or vibration.
DVD CLEANING DISCS
* When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in a circular motion. * Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended for analogue records.
DVD CLEANING THE DISC LENS
* If this unit still does not perform properly although you refer to the relevant sections and to `Troubleshooting' in this Owner's Manual, the laser optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult your dealer or an Authorized Service Center for inspection and cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.
DVD DISC HANDLING
* Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not adhere to the surfaces of the discs. * Always store the disc in its protective case when it is not used.
VCR AUTO HEAD CLEANING
* Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or remove a videotape, so you can see a clear picture. * Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted while the TV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulated on the video heads after a long period of use, or the usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If a streaky or snowy picture appears during playback, the video heads in the unit may need to be cleaned. 1. Please visit your local Audio / Video store and purchase a good quality VHS Video Head Cleaner. 2. If a Video Head Cleaner does not solve the problem, please call our help line mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized Service Center. NOTES: * Remember to read the instructions along with the video head cleaner before use. * Clean video heads only when problems occur.
136
Others Frequently Asked Questions
-- Can I record on CD-R / RW? No, this unit records only DVDs. www..com -- Can I play back DVD-Video that is bought in another country? Possible only if the region code of the disc is 1 or ALL. -- Is this unit JPEG compatible? No. -- Can I connect the unit to my PC? No, you cannot control the unit by PCs.
Before You Start Connections Initial Setups
Specification
General
System VCR video heads HDD Power requirements Power consumption Weight HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-RW/R, CD-DA, CD-RW/R, VCR Four heads Internal 3.5 inch HDD 160 GB AC120 V, 60 Hz 44 W (standby: 4.6 W) 12.2 lbs ( 5.6 kg ) Video Recording Format (DVD-RW only), Video Format (DVD-RW, DVD-R) DVD-ReWritable, DVD-Recordable Dimensions (width x height x depth) Operating temperature Operating humidity TV format 17 1/8" x 3 15/16" x 14 15/16" (435 x 99.5 x 380 mm) 41F to 104F (5C to 40C) less than 80% (non condensing) NTSC
Recording / Dubbing
Recording
Recording format Video recording format 13.5MHz Sampling frequency Compression format MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency 48kHz Compression format Dolby Digital
Playback
Recordable discs
Tuner
Receivable channels VHF 2-13ch UHF 14-69ch CATV C1-C125ch
Editing Other Setups
Input/Output
Video input Input level Jacks S-Video input Y (Iuminance) - Input level C (color) - Input level Jacks Audio input During audio input Jacks Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) 1 Vp-p (75) RCA jack Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) 1 Vp-p (75) 286 mVp-p (75) 4 pin mini DIN Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R 2V rms (47k) RCA jacks Video output Output level Jacks S-Video output Y (Iuminance) - Output level C (color) - Output level Jack Audio output During audio output Jacks Digital audio output Output level Jack VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal 1 Vp-p (75) RCA jack
VCR functions
1 Vp-p (75) 286 mVp-p (75) 4 pin mini DIN Output 1,2 L/R 2V rms (47k) RCA jacks 500 mVp-p (75) RCA jack
Component video output Output level Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75), PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75) Jacks RCA jacks
Others
VHF/UHF set 75
Note The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.
Espanol
137
Espanol Descripcion Funcional
2 3 4 5 6* 7 8
Panel Delantero www..com
* La unidad tambien puede encenderse presionando estos botones.
POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY REC/OTR CHANNEL OPEN / CLOSE DUBBING VCR HDD DVD STOP PLAY HDD REC/OTR DVD
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
1 26
25 24
23 22
21
20
19 17 18
16
15* 13 11 10 14* 12
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
POWER Luz de POWER Luz de REC/OTR (VCR) Compartimiento de casete Luz de Doblaje OPEN / CLOSE A* (DVD) Luz de REC/OTR (HDD/DVD) Bandeja de disco AUDIO IN (LINEA 2)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
VIDEO IN (LINEA 2) S-VIDEO IN (LINEA 2) RESET REC / OTR I (HDD / DVD) PLAY B* (HDD / DVD) STOP C * (HDD / DVD) Botones Seleccion de Dispositivo / Indicadores (VCR/HDD/DVD) 17 DUBBING HDD(c)DVD
2 3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
DUBBING VCR(c)DVD CHANNEL K / L Pantalla del Panel Delantero Sensor de control remoto REC / OTR I (VCR) PLAY B (VCR) F.FWD D (VCR) REW E (VCR) STOP / EJECT C A (VCR)
4
5
6
Panel trasero
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT L COAXIAL R
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN PR/CR
R
R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD
1
12 11
10
9
8
7
1 Cable electrico de CA 2 S-VIDEO IN (LINEA 1) 3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD) 4 AUDIO IN (LINEA 1)
5 6 7 8
AUDIO OUT TV ANTENNA IN TV ANTENNA OUT VIDEO OUT
9 10 11 12
VIDEO IN (LINEA 1) S-VIDEO OUT (HDD / DVD) AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD) COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (HDD / DVD)
Control remoto
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
15 16 17*
1
.@/: ABC DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
18
2
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
3 4 5 6
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
19 20 21
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
22 23
7 8
REV
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
PLAY
FWD
9 10* 11 12
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
13
DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE
14
24 25 26 27* 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
* En HDD / DVD La unidad tambien puede encenderse presionando estos botones.
POWER Botones Numericos PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP MENU / LIST (HDD / DVD) Cursor / / / DISPLAY SKIP j / i (HDD / DVD) REV E PLAY B * SLOW (VCR) REC MONITOR (HDD / DVD) REC MODE DUBBING MENU TIMER PROG. INPUT SELECT OPEN / CLOSE EJECT A (DVD / VCR) * CHANNEL /
CLEAR AUDIO TOP MENU (HDD / DVD) ENTER RETURN VARIABLE SKIP (HDD / DVD) 25 VARIABLE REPLAY (HDD / DVD) 26 FWD D 27 STOP C * 28 PAUSE F Botones Seleccion de Dispositivo: 29 VCR 30 HDD 31 DVD 32 REC / OTR (VCR) 33 REC / OTR (HDD) 34 REC / OTR (DVD) 35 SEARCH MODE (VCR)
19 20 21 22 23 24
138
Espanol Conexion a un TV
Antena
Before You Start
Senal de TV cable www..com
(Atras del TV)
Antena
Senal de TV cable
(Atras del TV)
o
3
Conecte Cable RF (entregado)
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
o
Enchufe el cable 4 electrico de esta unidad.
Connections
1
Desconecte
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
/DVD
AUDIO OUT L
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN
R
R
Nota
2
Conecte
Initial Setups
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R OUT
PR/CR
OUT
HDD/DVD
* Puede conectar a un TV con cables A/V o cable RF.
(Atras de esta unidad)
Haga una de las siguientes conexiones, segun la capacidad de su equipo existente.
Conexion de Audio Basico
HDD/DVD TV
AUDIO IN
Conexiones de video
Calidad de la imagen Basico
V V
V (V = Hay, - = No hay)
Recording / Dubbing
Bueno
O
V
Mejor
O
V
VCR
TV
(necesario)
S-VIDEO IN
(Compatible con el modo de escaneo progresivo)
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y
VIDEO IN
Playback
PB/CB
PR/CR
Cable de audio (entregado)
Cable Video (entregado)
Esta unidad
HDD/DVD/VCR
Cable S-Video (en venta en los comercios)
S-VIDEO
Cable de video componente (en venta en los comercios)
Editing
DD/DVD
AUDIO OUT
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN
L
HDD/DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT L COAXIAL R
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
HDD/DVD/VCR
R
VIDEO OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDD/DVD/VCR
PB/CB IN PR/CR
R
R
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
HDD/DVD
Esta unidad
AUDIO OUT
Other Setups
L
Y
HDD/DVD/VCR
R
VIDEO OUT
IN
PB/CB
AUDIO OUT
OUT
HDD/DVD
PR/CR
* Estas tomas solo son utiles
en el modo HDD / DVD.
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VCR functions
Si su TV es compatible con el escaneo progresivo 525 o 625 y desea disfrutar de la imagen de alta calidad;
Utilice la conexion COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, ajuste el "Progresivo" a "On" en el Menu de Preparacion (vea la pagina 117) y asegurese que la indicacion "P.SCAN" esta activada en la Pantalla del Panel Delantero.
Si su TV no es compatible con el escaneo progresivo;
Si su TV no es compatible con el escaneo progresivo ajuste "Progresivo" a "Off " en el Menu de Preparacion y asegurese que la indicacion "P.SCAN" esta activada en la Pantalla del Panel Delantero.
Others
Despues de terminar las conexiones
Encienda su TV al canal de entrada externo adecuado (normalmente cerca del canal 0) para ver la salida de imagenes de esta unidad en el TV. Para encontrar el canal de entrada externo, presione repetidamente el boton de canal en el remoto de su TV hasta que aparezca la imagen de la grabadora de DVD.
Espanol
139
Espanol Configuraciones iniciales
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Primera vez que encienda la unidad
1
DEF
Despues de hacer todas las conexiones necesarias encienda el TV y seleccione el canal de entrada externo adecuado. (vea la pagina 139.) Presione POWER. Aparecera la pantalla de abajo. Este menu puede no aparecer si ya activo la unidad antes.Vea las paginas 21-24 del Manual de Instrucciones en este caso.
OSD Language English
.@/:
ABC
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
2
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
Francais Espanol Espa
AUDIO CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Si presiona PLAY B en este punto, se seleccionara automaticamente "English" y puede saltear los pasos 3 y 4.
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
3 4
Presione / para seleccionar "English", "Francais" o "Espanol". Presione ENTER. Despues de seleccionar el idioma, la Configuracion Automatica de Canales empezara automaticamente. Despues de terminar la Configuracion Automatica de Canales de Canales, se activara automaticamente la Funcion Automatica de Reloj y se ajustara a la hora correcta.
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Ajuste de audio del TV
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
1 2 3
Presione SETUP. Utilice / para seleccionar "Config. Inic.". Presione ENTER. Utilice / para seleccionar "Configur. Canal". Presione ENTER. Aparecera el Menu de Configuracion de Canal.
Configur. Configur Canal Ajuste A Auto Ajuste Manual Manual Selec. de Audio de TV
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Notas para el audio del canal de TV
* Consulte el siguiente cuadro para comprobar una configuracion adecuada.
Audio Grabacion de Canal audio Canal audio seleccionado HDD/DVD/VCR principal secundario ESTEREO SAP ESTEREO ESTEREO NONE ESTEREO Estereo MONO SAP MONO MONO NONE MONO ESTEREO SAP SAP ESTEREO NONE ESTEREO SAP MONO SAP SAP MONO NONE MONO
4
Utilice / para seleccionar "Selec. de Audio de TV". Presione ENTER. Aparecera la ventana de Opciones.
Selec. de Audio de TV
Audio transmitido
Estereo Est SAP
5
Utilice / para seleccionar "Estereo" o "SAP". Presione ENTER. Estereo: Sale audio principal. SAP (Programa de Audio Secundario): Sale el audio secundario. Presione SETUP para salir.
6
140
Espanol Grabacion en HDD / DVD
Recordable disc
Discos que pueden utilizarse con esta grabadora: www..com * Disco DVD-R: hasta 16x (se recomienda un disco de 4x u 8x) * Disco DVD-RW: 2x y 4x (se recomienda un disco de 2x) Discos inspeccionados y prueban que son compatibles con esta grabadora: MAXELL discos DVD-R 4x TDK discos DVD-RW 2x JVC discos DVD-RW 4x MITSUBISHI discos DVD-R 8x
Tipo de disco Formato de disco Funciones Modo de Video Reproduccion, grabacion, Video edicion limitada DVD-RW DVD-RW Modo de VR
VR
Before You Start
Modo gra
Puede seleccionar un Modo gra entre las seis opciones y el tiempo de grabacion y la cualidad de imagen/audio del material grabado depende del Modo gra seleccionado.
Tamano de disco Modo gra XP SP Disco de 8 cm LP EP SLP SEP XP SP Disco de 12cm LP EP SLP SEP XP HDD (Interno) SP LP EP SLP SEP Tiempo de Calidad de grabacion video/Sonido 18 min 36 min 72 min 108 min 144 min 180 min 60 min 120 min 240 min 360 min 480 min 600 min 34 H 68 H 136 H 204 H (malo) (bueno) (malo) (bueno) (bueno)
Connections Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing
DVD-RW
Reproduccion, grabacion, edicion de Lista Original / Playlist
Modo de Video Reproduccion, grabacion limitada, edicion limitada DVD-R DVD-R
Playback
272 H 340 H (malo)
Los reproductores de DVD con son capaces de reproducir discos DVD-RW grabados en el modo de VR.
Para seleccionar el Modo gra preferido, presione repetidamente REC MODE.
Formateado de un disco
VR Video
Editing
DVD-RW
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
DVD-RW
.@/:
ABC
DEF
El tipo de formato de grabacion seleccionado aqui se memorizara y aplicara al disco siempre que formatee los discos DVD-RW.
Other Setups
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
1 2 3
Presione SETUP. Utilice / para seleccionar "Menu DVD". Presione ENTER. Utilice / para seleccionar "Formato grabac. DVD". Presione ENTER. Aparecera la ventana de Opciones.
Formato g abac. DVD mato grabac. VD VR Video
7
8
SPACE
9
VCR functions
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
4
Utilice / para seleccionar "VR" o "Video". Presione ENTER. Format Auto Cuando coloque un disco DVD-RW completamente nuevo, la unidad formateara automaticamente el disco en el tipo de formato de grabacion seleccionado en esta seccion.
Others
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Espanol
VCR
HDD
DVD
141
Espanol Grabacion en HDD / DVD (Cont.) Grabacion basica
www..com
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Lo siguiente le ayudara a entender facilmente como grabar en HDD interno o en DVD.
Asegurese que hay pilas en el control remoto y que ha conectado correctamente esta unidad y el TV.
Paso 1: Elija el tipo de disco y el Formato de grabac. (Solo si esta grabando a un DVD.)
o
Paso 2: Preparacion del medio
1 Para encender. 2 Seleccione el equipo que desea utilizar. (Si esta grabando en HDD, salte desde el paso 3.)
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
3 Abra la bandeja del disco y coloque un disco en la bandeja.
4 Cierre la bandeja del disco.
TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
TIMER PROG.
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
POWER
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
GHI REC MONITOR
2
JKL VCR
3
MNO HDD CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
2
3
CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ DVD
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
7
8
SPACE
9
Puede demorar en cargar el disco.
0
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
0
* Si carga un disco DVD-RW completamente nuevo, el Formato Auto empezara automaticamente.
Paso 5: Empiece a grabar. Paso 3: Seleccione el modo de grabacion.
SLOW STOP PAUSE REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
* Cuando graba en HDD: Presione REC / OTR (HDD). * Cuando graba en DVD: Presione REC / OTR (DVD).
SLOW STOP PAUSE
MODO HDD
DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
HDD LP 65:56
CH8
I
HDD Gra LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
Paso 4: Seleccione el canal que desea grabar.
CH 8
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT .@/: ABC DEF
Paso 6: Pare la grabacion.
SKIP REPLAY SKIP
MODO HDD
REV PLAY FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
7
8
SPACE
9
C I
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
HDD Det. grab LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
0
PROGRAM
Esta operacion puede demorar en reconocerse.
Nota
El HDD es un lugar de memorizacion temporal.
* El HDD no es un lugar de memoria permanente del contenido grabado. Asegurese de utilizar como lugar de memoria temporal hasta que mire los programas una vez, edite o copie en un disco DVD o videocinta.
Disco duro de 160 GB
* Esta unidad tiene un disco duro de 160 GB que permite grabar hasta 340 horas (en el modo SEP).
142
Espanol Grabacion en HDD / DVD (Cont.)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Doblaje basico
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
VCR
.@/:
ABC
DEF
Se mostro como ejemplo en la figura el doblaje de HDD a DVD. Consulte el Manual de instrucciones sobre la forma de hacer otros tipos de doblaje.
Connections
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
1
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Presione DUBBING MENU. Apareceran el Sentido doblaje y el Menu de Modo gra.
DOBLAJE
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
Sentido doblaje
Modo gra
HDD DVD VD
AUDIO CLEAR
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP
HDD VCR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
DVD VD VCR
Alto XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
Recording / Dubbing
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
2
Utilice / y seleccione el sentido de doblaje deseado y presione ENTER. Ejemplo: HDD (c) DVD
DOBLAJE
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
Playback
Sentido doblaje
REV PLAY FWD
Modo g gra
HDD DVD VD
DVD DVD HDD VCR HDD VCR DVD DVD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
HDD VCR
REC MONITOR VCR HDD DVD
DVD VD
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
VCR
Alto XP SP LP EP SLP SEP Auto uto
Editing
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3
Utilice / y seleccione el Modo gra deseado. Presione ENTER. Aparecera el Menu Superior de Doblaje.
DOBLAJE
Other Setups
Lista doblaje
Sentido HDD
DVD DVD
Modo
XP
Selec prog ama programa Inic doblaje doblaje
VCR functions
4
Utilice / para seleccionar "Selec programa". Presione ENTER. Aparecera la Lista de programa.
DOBLAJE
Lista progr. (Or (Original)
Lista doblaje
Others
1 Titulo 1 ulo 2 Titulo 2 ulo 3 Titulo 3 ulo 4 Titulo 4 ulo 5 Titulo 5 ulo 6 Titulo 6 ulo 7 Titulo 7 ulo 8 Titulo 8 ulo
Espanol
143
Espanol Grabacion en HDD / DVD (Cont.)
5
www..com Presione ENTER.
Utilice
/
y seleccione un programa deseado.
Finalizacion
VR Video
Aparecera el Menu de Lista progr.
Anad a lista doblaje Playlist Pla Decid.
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Debe finalizar primero el disco antes de reproducirlo en otra unidad.
6
Utilice / para seleccionar "Anad a lista doblaje". Presione ENTER. El programa seleccionado se agregara a la Lista doblaje.
DOBLAJE
1 2 3
Presione SETUP. Utilice / para seleccionar "Menu DVD". Presione ENTER. Utilice / para seleccionar "Finalizar". Presione ENTER. Aparecera la ventana de confirmacion.
Finaliz disco? Finaliz Si No
Lista progr. (Or (Original)
Lista doblaje
1 Titulo 1 tulo 2 Titulo 2 tulo 3 Titulo 3 tulo 4 Titulo 4 tulo 5 Titulo 5 tulo 6 Titulo 6 tulo 7 Titulo 7 tulo 8 Titulo 8 tulo
2 Titulo 2 tulo
7 8
Repita los pasos 5 y 6 hasta que seleccione todos los programas a doblar. Despues de seleccionar todos los programas para volver al deseados, presione RETURN Menu Superior de Doblaje.
DOBLAJE
* Si ya finalizo el disco, "Anular Finalizar" aparecera en la lista en el menu en lugar de "Finalizar" (solo DVD-RW). Para anular la finalizacion del disco, seleccione "Anular Finalizar" y presione ENTER.
4
Utilice / para seleccionar "Si". Presione ENTER. Aparecera la ventana de confirmacion final.
Est Ud seguro? Est Si No
Lista doblaje
Sentido HDD
DVD DVD
2 Titulo 2 ulo 4 Titulo 4 ulo
Modo
XP
Selec prog ama programa Inic doblaje doblaje
5
Utilice / para seleccionar "Si". Presione ENTER. Empezara la finalizacion. * Si desea parar el proceso, presione ENTER.
9
Utilice / para seleccionar "Inic doblaje". Presione ENTER. Aparecera la ventana de confirmacion.
Iniciar doblaje? Si No
Finalizar
Cancel
10
Utilice / para seleccionar "Si". Presione ENTER. Empezara el doblaje. * Puede demorar en prepararse para el doblaje.
Esta operacion puede demorar en reconocerse.
Para parar el doblaje durante el modo de preparacion de doblaje: * Presione primero el Boton de Seleccion de Equipo del medio de grabacion y presione STOP C. O presione STOP/EJECT C A en el panel delantero. Para parar el doblaje en progreso: * Presione primero el Boton de Seleccion de Equipo del medio de grabacion y mantenga presionado STOP C durante 2 segundos, o presione STOP/EJECT C A en el panel delantero.
144
Espanol Reproduccion de HDD / DVD
Antes de reproducir discos DVD, lea la siguiente informacion.
www..com Discos que puede reproducir Esta unidad es compatible para reproducir los siguientes discos.
Before You Start
Sistemas de color
Los DVD se graban en diferentes sistemas de color en diferentes regiones del mundo. El sistema de color mas comun es NTSC (que se utiliza primariamente en los Estados Unidos y Canada). Esta unidad utiliza NTSC y los DVD que reproduce deben grabarse en el sistema NTSC. No puede reproducir DVD grabados en otro sistema de color.
Connections
Los discos con los siguientes simbolos pueden reproducirse en la unidad. No se garantiza la reproduccion de otros tipos de discos.
Discos DVD-VIDEO DVD-RW (Modo de VIDEO/VR) DVD-R (Modo de VIDEO) CD-DA (AUDIO CD) CD-RW (Formato CD-DA, archivos MP3 / WMA) CD-R (Formato CD-DA, archivos MP3 / WMA) Simbolo
Initial Setups Recording / Dubbing Playback
Codigos de region Los DVD deben tener la etiqueta para todas las regiones o para la Region 1. Busque los siguientes simbolos en su DVD.
es una marca registrada de DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Editing
Reproduzca el contenido grabado
Puede seleccionar el titulo que desea reproducir de la Lista de Titulos. Puede acceder facilmente a la Lista de Titulos presionando TOP MENU. Puede llamar tambien los titulos grabados presionando PROGRAM RECORDINGS (solo la Lista Original del HDD). Inicio de grab. Parada/inicio Parada grab. Other Setups
Que son titulos y capitulos?
El contenido del HDD / DVD se divide normalmente en titulos. Los titulos pueden dividirse a su vez en capitulos.
Titulo 1 Titulo 2
VCR functions
Que es una Lista Original y una Lista de reproduccion?
A lo largo de este manual encontrara Lista Original y Lista de reproduccion para referirse al contenido Original y a la version editada. (Vea la pagina 89.) * Lista Original se refiere a lo que se grabo originalmente en el disco. * Lista de reproduccion se refiere a la version editada del contenido Lista Original.
Capitulo 1 Capitulo 2 Capitulo 3 Capitulo 1 Capitulo 2
Others Espanol
145
Espanol Reproduccion de HDD / DVD (Cont.)
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Reproduccion basica
VR Video
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-R
CD
.@/:
ABC
DEF
Si esta reproduciendo HDD, presione primero HDD. Si esta reproduciendo un disco, presione primero DVD.
CHANNEL
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
7
8
SPACE
9
1 2 3
Si esta reproduciendo HDD, salte al paso 4. Presione OPEN / CLOSE A para abrir la bandeja del disco. Coloque el disco con su etiqueta hacia arriba. Alinee el Disco con la guia de la bandeja del disco.
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO CLEAR
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
guia de bandeja de disco
Presione otra vez OPEN / CLOSE A para cerrar la bandeja del disco. Presione PLAY B para empezar a reproducir un CD. Para la Reproduccion HDD/DVD vaya al paso 4. * Puede demorar en cargar el disco.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
4
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
PresioneTOP MENU. Aparecera la lista de titulo. Ejemplo: HDD
GRABAC. ANTERIORES
ABR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
HDD ORG HDD DVD DVD PL ORG PL
CH12
XP
1 2
1
2
3
ABR/01/05 12:15PM
MAY/01/05 12:15PM
JUN/04/05 10:00AM
4
5
6
JUN/15/05 11:05AM
JUL/05/05 11:40PM
JUL/18/05 10:00AM
Presione MENU / LIST para cambiar entre Lista Original / Playlist si fuera necesario.
5 6
Utilice / / / para seleccionar un titulo deseado y presione PLAY B. Empezara la reproduccion. Presione STOP C para parar la reproduccion.
146
Espanol VCR
www..com
POWER TIMER PROG. INPUT OPEN/CLOSE SELECT EJECT
Before You Start
Grabacion basica
VCR
Antes de grabar, asegurese de que:
* Se selecciono el canal deseado presionando los botones numericos o CHANNEL / . * Hay una cinta con la lengueta para grabacion intacta en la unidad. * Se selecciona el Modo gra deseado (SP: reproduccion normal o SLP: reproduccion de larga duracion) presionando REC MODE en el control remoto.
Connections
.@/:
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO CHANNEL
4
PQRS
5
TUV
6
WXYZ
Initial Setups
7
8
SPACE
9
Modo gra
CLEAR
0
PROGRAM RECORDINGS SETUP AUDIO
Velocidad de la cinta Tipo de cinta Modo SP Modo SLP
T60 1 hora 3 horas
Tiempo de grabacion/reproduccion T210 T120 T160 2 horas 2-2/3 horas 3-1/2 horas 6 horas 8 horas 10-1/2 horas
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
* Se selecciona Estereo o SAP.
ENTER DISPLAY RETURN
Recording / Dubbing
Presione primero VCR.
1
SKIP
VARIABLE VARIABLE REPLAY SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
Presione REC / OTR (VCR) para empezar la grabacion. Para parar temporalmente o seguir con la grabacion, presione PAUSE F. Despues de que la unidad ha estado en pausa durante cinco minutos, se parara automaticamente para proteger la videocinta y la cabeza de video contra danos. Presione STOP C cuando se complete la grabacion.
Playback
REC MONITOR
VCR
HDD
DVD
2
REC MODE REC/OTR
REC/OTR
REC/OTR
Editing
Prevencion contra borrado accidental
DUBBING MENU SEARCH MODE
Para evitar una grabacion por accidente en un casete grabado, rompa la lengueta de grabacion. Para volver a grabar posteriormente, cubra el orificio con cinta adhesiva.
Lengueta de grabacion
Other Setups
Reproduccion basica
VCR
Presione primero VCR.
VCR functions
1 2
OPEN / CLOSE POWER STOP/EJECT REW F.FWD PLAY REC/OTR CHANNEL DUBBING VCR HDD DVD STOP PLAY HDD REC/OTR DVD
Coloque una cinta pregrabada y presione PLAY B para empezar la reproduccion. * Si no tiene lengueta para grabacion, la reproduccion empieza automaticamente. Durante la reproduccion, presione PAUSE F. Se hara una pausa de reproduccion y se silenciara el sonido. Presione PLAY B para continuar la reproduccion. Presione STOP C para detener la reproduccion. Presione STOP / EJECT C A en el panel delantero de la unidad para expulsar la cinta.
Others
VCR DVD
RESET S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
HDD DVD
POWER
STOP / EJECT C A
3 4 5
Espanol
147
www..com
LIMITED WARRANTY
FUNAI CORP. will repair this product, free of charge in the USA in the event of defect in materials or workmanship as follows:
DURATION: PARTS: LABOR:
FUNAI CORP. will provide parts to replace defective parts without charge for one (1) year from the date of original retail purchase. Certain parts are excluded from this warranty. FUNAI CORP. will provide the labor without charge for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of original retail purchase.
LIMITS AND EXCLUSIONS: This warranty is extended only to the original retail purchaser. A purchase receipt or other proof of original retail purchase will be required together with the product to obtain service under this warranty. This warranty shall not be extended to any other person or transferee. This warranty is void and of no effect if any serial numbers on the product are altered, replaced, defaced, missing or if service was attempted by an unauthorized service center. This limited warranty does not apply to any product not purchased and used in the United States. This product is produced for home use and this warranty only covers failures due to defects in material or workmanship which occurs during normal use. It does not cover damage which occurs in shipment, or failures which are caused by repairs, alterations or product not supplied by FUNAI CORP., or damage which results from accident, misuse, abuse, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, improper maintenance, commercial use such as hotel, rental or office use of this product or damage which results from fire, flood, lightning or other acts of God. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER PACKING MATERIALS, ANY ACCESSORIES (EXCEPT REMOTE CONTROL), ANY COSMETIC PARTS, COMPLETE ASSEMBLY PARTS, DEMO OR FLOOR MODELS. FUNAI CORP. AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES OR AGENTS SHALL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR OCCASIONED BY THE USE OF OR THE INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND OF ALL OTHER LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF FUNAI, ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY FUNAI AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES IN THE UNITED STATES. ALL WARRANTY INSPECTIONS AND REPAIRS MUST BE PERFORMED BY AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER. THIS WARRANTY IS ONLY VALID WHEN THE UNIT IS CARRIED-IN TO AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER.
IMPORTANT:
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IF, AT ANY TIME DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD, YOU ARE UNABLE TO OBTAIN SATISFACTION WITH THE REPAIR OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE CONTACT FUNAI CORP.
ATTENTION:
FUNAI CORP. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY ANY DESIGN OF THIS PRODUCT WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE.
To locate your nearest AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER or for general service inquiries, please contact us at:
FUNAI CORPORATION Customer Service
Tel :1-800-605-8453 http://www.SylvaniaConsumerElectronics.com
19900 Van Ness Avenue, Torrance, CA 90501
Printed in China
1VMN21832 E4380UD / E438PUD 55555


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of HDRV200F

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X